manualshive.com logo in svg

Rohde & Schwarz R&S UPP, User Manual

Share
Download
Rohde & Schwarz R&S UPP User Manual Download Page 87

Startup

R&S

®

 UPP

71

User Manual 1411.1055.32 ─ 10

2.13.5

 

Deleting Backups

Deleting factory default setting

The factory default is treated in exactly the same way as a normal backup. Take care
not to inadvertently delete the factory default!

Using the TAB keys, select the backup to be deleted. Then select "Delete Selected"
and confirm with ENTER. To exit the Backup and Recovery system, select "Exit and
Reboot" and confirm with ENTER. The instrument is rebooted.

Windows

 

7 Recovery and Backup

Summary of Contents for R&S UPP

Page 1: ...R S UPP Audio Analyzer User Manual User Manual Version 10 1411105532 ÅP ...

Page 2: ...89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R S is a registered trademark of Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners 1411 1055 32 Version 10 R S UPP The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R S UPP is abbreviated as R S UPP ...

Page 3: ...se of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the product requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained ...

Page 4: ...ration item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided ...

Page 5: ...safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the mains supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 In the ca...

Page 6: ...st be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage 14 Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock 15 Any object that ...

Page 7: ...e masks and protective clothing must be worn 7 Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions m...

Page 8: ...ackaging until they are ready to be used 4 Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted 5 If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid 6 Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline...

Page 9: ...obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reaso...

Page 10: ...na forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentación informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimien...

Page 11: ...inua DC Advertencia superficie caliente Corriente alterna AC Conexión a conductor de protección Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC Conexión a tierra El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexión a masa Distintivo de la UE para baterías y acumuladores Más información en la sección Eliminación protección del medio ambiente punto 1 Aviso Cuidado en el m...

Page 12: ...ante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques eléctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes 1 Si n...

Page 13: ... bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión la longitud del cable de conexión no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deberá colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalación 5 No utilice nunca el producto s...

Page 14: ...redundar en peligro para las personas 17 No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico 18 Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión p ej r...

Page 15: ...N 55032 CISPR 32 Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A están destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos res...

Page 16: ...n ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios 7 Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica Las baterías o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje 8 En caso de devolver baterías de litio a las filiales ...

Page 17: ... producto o componente más allá del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o níquel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formación adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños para la salud Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la elimi...

Page 18: ...supportcenter A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with youto find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applicationsof Rohde Schwarz products Contact information Contact our customer support center at www rohde schwarz com support or follow this QR code QR code to the Rohde Schwarz support page ...

Page 19: ...tus LEDs 29 2 2 Description of the Rear Panel 30 2 2 1 Remote control connectors 30 2 2 2 PC interfaces 31 2 2 3 Cascading Connections 31 2 2 4 BNC monitor outputs 32 2 2 5 AC Supply Voltage Connector 32 2 3 Putting into Operation 33 2 3 1 Unpacking the instrument 33 2 3 2 Setting Up the Instrument 34 2 3 3 Connecting the R S UPP to the AC Supply 36 2 4 Function Check 39 2 5 Presets 39 2 6 Windows...

Page 20: ...ng the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition Menu 63 2 12 2 Backup Current System Partition 64 2 12 3 Restoring a Selected Version of the System Partition 65 2 12 4 Recover Factory Default 66 2 12 5 Deleting Backups 66 2 13 Windows 7 Recovery and Backup 67 2 13 1 Calling Windows 7 Recovery and Backup Partition Menu 68 2 13 2 Restoring Factory Default 69 2 13 3 Restoring a User Backup 69 2 13 4 ...

Page 21: ...ation 112 4 1 Introduction Manual Operation 112 4 2 Functional Division of the Audio Analyzer 113 4 2 1 Instrument Concept 113 4 2 2 Generators 113 4 2 3 Analyzers 115 4 3 General Information on Operation 119 4 3 1 Windows User Interface 119 4 3 2 Operation Using the Mouse 120 4 3 3 Operation Using an External Computer Keyboard 120 4 4 The Display 122 4 4 1 The Screens 122 4 4 2 Softkeys 123 4 4 3...

Page 22: ...es during Measurement or Data Output 143 4 8 Measurement Displays 143 4 8 1 Measurement Functions and Displaying Measurement Results 144 4 8 2 Numeric Display Field 144 4 8 3 Combo Display 146 4 8 4 Graphical window 151 4 9 Settings in the Menu Bar 170 4 10 Settings on the Toolbar 176 4 11 Settings in the Operating System 177 4 12 Auxiliaries Panel 177 4 12 1 Audio Monitor Function 177 4 12 2 Trig...

Page 23: ...utputs of the Analog Multichannel Generator 203 5 2 6 Output Power of the Analog Multichannel Generator 204 5 3 Configuring the Digital Generator 205 5 3 1 Digital Generator Configuration Panel 205 5 3 2 Interface Assignment 210 5 4 Configuring the I2S Generator 212 5 4 1 I2S Generator Configuration Panel 212 5 4 2 Timing Diagrams 218 5 4 3 Interface Assignment 219 5 5 Configure HDMI Generator 222...

Page 24: ... Sweeps 285 5 9 1 Activating Deactivating the Sweep System 286 5 9 2 One Dimensional Sweep 288 5 9 3 Two Dimensional Sweep 289 5 9 4 Automatic Sweep 290 5 9 5 Linear and Logarithmic Sweep 292 5 9 6 List sweep 295 5 9 7 Behavior after Sweep End 297 5 9 8 Sweep Speed 298 5 10 Selecting the Analyzer 301 5 10 1 Analyzer Configuration Panel 301 5 11 Configure Analog Analyzer 302 5 11 1 Analyzer Configu...

Page 25: ... Condition 342 5 18 Time Controlled Measured value Recording 349 5 19 External Sweeps and Level Controlled Measured value Triggering 350 5 20 Sweep Options 353 5 20 1 Overview of Sweep Options 353 5 20 2 Activating and Deactivating Sweeps 354 5 20 3 States of the Sweep System 354 5 20 4 Several Sweep Traces in One Diagram 358 5 21 Level Measurements 359 5 21 1 Filter Settings 359 5 21 2 RMS Measur...

Page 26: ...ffers 427 5 30 Analysis in the Time Domain 430 5 30 1 Waveform Monitor 430 5 30 2 Delay Measurement 436 5 31 Protocol Analysis 440 5 31 1 Activating and Configuring the Protocol Analysis 440 5 31 2 Channel Status Information Display 443 5 31 3 Error Flag Display 444 5 32 Lip Sync analysis 445 5 33 BERT analysis 449 5 34 Frequency Phase and Group Delay Measurement 450 5 35 Input Monitor 455 5 36 Le...

Page 27: ... Parameters Common to All Filters 477 5 40 7 Filter Settling Time 477 5 41 Weighting Filters 478 5 42 Highpass and Lowpass 484 5 43 Auxiliaries Panel 485 5 44 Switcher Panel 489 5 44 1 Connecting Switcher to R S UPP 489 5 44 2 Default Setting 490 5 44 3 Operation 491 5 45 Config panel 493 5 46 Curve Spectrum and Bar Graph Display 499 5 46 1 Graphical Display Explanation of the Elements 500 5 46 2 ...

Page 28: ...ing Up 581 5 49 3 Parameter Fields of the Panel 582 5 49 4 Softkey Menu 596 5 50 Limit Monitoring 597 5 50 1 Traces and Bar Graphs 597 5 50 2 Measurement Results 600 5 51 Measured value Sequences 601 5 52 Store 602 5 52 1 Trace Files 602 5 52 2 Equalization Files 602 5 52 3 Sweep Lists 603 5 52 4 Limit Files 604 5 53 Load 604 5 53 1 Trace Files 604 5 53 2 Equalization Files 612 5 53 3 Sweep Lists ...

Page 29: ...Brief Instructions 639 6 2 1 IEC Bus 639 6 3 Changing to Remote Control 640 6 3 1 Remote Control by IEC IEEE Bus 640 6 3 2 Remote Control via LAN Interface 641 6 3 3 Remote Control via the USB Device Interface 646 6 4 Messages 648 6 4 1 Interface Messages 648 6 4 2 Device Dependent Messages 649 6 5 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax 650 6 5 1 Structure of a Program Message 653 6 5 2 Responses to Qu...

Page 30: ...9 6 8 7 STATus QUEStionable Register 671 6 8 8 STATus QUEStionable UNDERrange Register 672 6 8 9 STATus QUEStionable OVERrange Register 673 6 8 10 STATus QUEStionable MEASuring Register 674 6 8 11 STATus XQUEstionable Register 675 6 8 12 Use of Status Reporting System 675 6 8 13 Initializing the Status Reporting System 679 7 Remote Control Command Description 680 7 1 Notation of Device Specific Co...

Page 31: ...Multi channel Records 747 7 5 7 Output of Protocol Data 750 7 5 8 Output of Protocol Errors 750 7 6 Sweep Options 751 7 7 Selecting Measurement and Mode 752 7 8 Level Measurements 754 7 8 1 Filter Settings 754 7 8 2 RMS and RMS Selective Measurement 754 7 8 3 Peak Measurement 757 7 8 4 DC Voltage Measurement 757 7 9 Signal to Noise Measurements 757 7 9 1 S N Measurement Function 757 7 9 2 S N Sequ...

Page 32: ... Result Configuration 805 7 26 Softkey Commands of the Graphical Display 813 7 27 Transferring trace data 824 7 28 User definable data buffers 826 7 29 Hardcopy 828 7 30 MMEMory Subsystem 830 7 30 1 File Naming Conventions 831 7 30 2 Load and store setups 832 7 30 3 Common MMEMory commands 832 7 31 STATus Subsystem 835 7 32 SYSTem Subsystem 844 8 Cascading 849 8 1 Overview 849 8 2 Order Code of In...

Page 33: ... 7 1 Operating Slaves from Master 867 8 7 2 Distribution of SCPI Commands in Cascade 867 8 7 3 Query Commands 869 8 8 Generators in Cascade 877 8 9 Switcher Control in Cascade 877 9 Maintenance and Instrument Interfaces 878 9 1 Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces 878 9 2 Maintenance 878 9 3 Changing the AC Supply Fuse 878 9 4 Instrument Interfaces 879 9 4 1 IEC IEEE Bus Interface IEC 625 IEEE ...

Page 34: ...Contents R S UPP 18 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 ...

Page 35: ...o use the R S UPP safely and efficiently Keep the product documentation in a safe place and pass it on to the subsequent users Safety information is part of the product documentation It warns you about the poten tial dangers and gives instructions how to prevent personal injury or damage caused by dangerous situations Safety information is provided as follows In the Basic Safety Instructions safet...

Page 36: ...ty procedures manual deals with security issues when work ing with the R S UPP in secure areas Data sheet and brochure The data sheet contains the technical specifications of the R S UPP It lists the options their order numbers and optional accessories The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific characteristics Release notes and open source acknowledgment Releas...

Page 37: ...DF and online manual on the Internet comprise the entire manual The individual menus and functions of the instrument including the associated remote control commands are explained in detail in chapter Instrument Functions Information on remote control of the instrument is provided in the chapters Remote Control Fundamentals and Remote Control Commands Description A detailed description of the inst...

Page 38: ...utton 5 STANDBY pushbutton 6 STATUS LEDs 2 1 1 USB Connectors USB 2 0 ports Universal Serial Bus of type A host USB Connecting peripherals such as mouse keyboard printer Connecting a mass storage device such as a USB stick for transferring files There are additional USB interfaces on the rear of the instrument 2 1 2 Digital Audio Interfaces Inputs and outputs for connecting digital consumer instru...

Page 39: ...ub connector for connecting the balanced input and output signals for the SPDIF or AES EBU format acc to EIAJ CP 340 for the pin assignment see Chap ter 5 Instrument Functions on page 195 The R S UPP Z2 cable option must be used to maintain EMC Class B I2S 25 contact D Sub connector for connecting the input and output lines of the I S interfa ces for the pin assignment see Chapter 5 Instrument Fun...

Page 40: ...rth Elektronik split ferrite 722 712 21 as well as a maximum length of 3 m is to be used AUX IN Input socket for feeding an externally generated video signal The video data together with all the HDMI protocol data as well as info frames with the exception of the inter nally generated audio info frame are combined with the internally generated audio data and output via the Source socket To maintain...

Page 41: ...A a suitable HDMI cable with multiple shielding and two ferrites e g Würth Elektronik split ferrite 722 712 21 as well as a maximum length of 3 m is to be used HEC Sink Decoupling of the Home Ethernet Channel at the HEC RJ 45 socket The figure below shows a typical application scenario The HDMI 1 4 implementation in the R S UPP supports the Audio Return Channel ARC as well as the Home Ethernet Cha...

Page 42: ...nel audio genera tor is installed ANALOG OUT Eight analog outputs brought out on the pins of a 25 pin D Sub socket As an accessory for the R S UPP B8 option multichannel audio generator a break out cable with a 25 pin D Sub connector on the one end and eight XLR connectors on the other end is available R S UP Z8A option refer to data sheet for the order num ber Description of the Front View ...

Page 43: ... UPP variants from top to bottom R S UPP 800 R S UPP 400 R S UPP 200 Damage to the instrument The instrument complies with measuring category I make sure that the input voltage at the sockets of the analog analyzers does not exceed 50 V RMS sine wave and 70 V peak value Do not use the instrument in measuring categories II III and IV Explanation Measuring circuits as defined in section 6 7 4 of EN6...

Page 44: ...art the ANLR OVRG LED is illuminated briefly in yellow As soon as this LED is illuminated in yellow press the LAN RESET button briefly The LED flashes for confirmation Within the next 5 seconds press the LAN RESET pushbutton again briefly The Master PRESET is now carried out and forces a switchover to the external monitor with a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels and the factory default settin...

Page 45: ... switched on CASCADE LED is lit not flashing The instrument is in cascading mode LED is flashing The instrument is in the configuration phase of a cascading LAN The instrument is integrated in a local network GEN OVLD LED is yellow The outputs of the audio analyzer have been deactivated using the Output OFF function LED is red The generator has been switched off at high impedance because an extern...

Page 46: ...lt 2 2 Description of the Rear Panel This section provides an overview of the connectors at the rear panel of the R S UPP Specifications for the connectors can be found in the data sheet Figure 2 3 Rear view of the R S UPP 1 Remote control connectors 2 PC interfaces 3 Cascading connections 4 BNC monitor outputs 5 AC supply voltage connector 2 2 1 Remote control connectors IEEE 488 IEC IEEE bus con...

Page 47: ...ports Universal Serial Bus of type A host USB Connecting peripherals such as mouse keyboard printer Connecting a mass storage device such as a USB stick for transferring files There are additional USB interfaces on the front of the instrument 2 2 3 Cascading Connections The use of a double shielded BNC cable is recommended as connecting cable whether for cascading devices or connecting a device un...

Page 48: ...with integrated power switch Shutting down the operating system It is urgently recommended to shut down the operating system first before switching off the instrument via the power switch by switching off the instrument with the standby mode pushbutton POWER LED should be orange before the shutdown AC Supply Voltage Connector If the instrument is connected to the AC supply voltage it automatically...

Page 49: ...elow to prevent injury to people or damage to the instrument This is particularly important if the instrument is used for the first time The general safety instructions at the beginning of this manual must also be observed 2 3 1 Unpacking the instrument The instrument is delivered together with the accessories in one box Proceed as fol lows to unpack its contents 1 Remove the instrument from its p...

Page 50: ... ambient temperature must comply with the range specified in the data sheet All fan openings must be clear and the airflow at the openings of the side walls must not be impeded The distance to the wall must be at least 10 cm Possible damage from electrostatic discharge Electrical discharges can damage components of the instrument or a connected device under test For this reason the instrument may ...

Page 51: ...or CAT7 cables for the LAN interface 2 3 2 1 Separate installation The R S UPP can be set up on a level surface in horizontal position and with unfolded instrument feet Risk of injury with unfolded instrument feet The instrument feet can suddenly fold back if the instrument is being moved or the feet are not completely folded out This can lead to personal injuries or damage to the instrument Instr...

Page 52: ...ntilation openings must be clear ensure that air can freely exit at the holes on the sides The minimum distance to the wall should therefore be at least 10 cm The instrument must be dry The instrument should only be operated in the horizontal position on an even sur face The ambient temperature must not exceed the range specified in the data sheet It must be ensured that none of the voltage levels...

Page 53: ...tched on If the instrument is switched on the POWER LED is green if the instrument is switched off but in standby mode the POWER LED is yellow 2 3 3 2 Start Screen and Booting of the R S UPP Without connected monitor After switching on the instrument with the standby mode pushbutton the POWER LED changes from orange to green After a certain period of time the BUSY LED lights up followed by the REA...

Page 54: ... All Programs Rohde Schwarz UPP and clicking on the R S UPx firmware icon With remote control You can also shut down the operating system by using the SYSTem SHUTdown command In case of an unexpected software lockup the instrument can be rebooted only by switching the power switch on and off again and pressing the standby mode pushbut ton When using an external monitor an external keyboard and a m...

Page 55: ...connected monitor A preset can be executed only via the remote control command Common Com mand RST With connected monitor ext keyboard and mouse Open the menu bar and select Preset Load Default The preset function sets all parameters and settings even those of inactive operating modes The most important parameters set here are Generator frequency analog 1 kHz Generator level analog 0 1 V Generator...

Page 56: ...nalyzer Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like a keyboard or printer are installed or in the event that the network configuration does not correspond to the default settings see sections below After switching on the audio analyzer the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automati cally without a password prompt auto login Auto login is performe...

Page 57: ...mware versions 3 x and older the Windows ver sion and the computer hardware information can be retrieved as follows Call up the system settings under Windows via the menu Start Control Panel System This opens a window with the name System Properties The desired information can be found under the General tab With firmware version 4 x the computer hardware information can be checked directly in the ...

Page 58: ... a commercially available mouse with USB interface The mouse makes it easier to move and resize the panels graphical windows on the screen and provides alternative operating modes This is recommended for convenient operation of Windows The mouse is connected to one of the USB interfaces on the front or rear of the instru ment The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected Special setting...

Page 59: ...ing of the screen resolution when using an external monitor is described below Setting external monitor resolution to higher than 800 x 600 pixels 1 Right click the desktop to open the context menu 2 Select Graphics Properties 3 A dialog box opens in which a screen resolution can be selected e g 1024 x 768 4 Click on Apply 5 Click OK to confirm the change and then click OK again to close the windo...

Page 60: ...witch off R S UPP 2 Connect the external monitor keyboard and mouse 3 Switch on R S UPP 4 After starting the R S UPP exit or minimize the UPP program by clicking on the buttons on the right in the title bar 5 Right click the desktop to open the context menu 6 Select Screen resolution and set the desired resolution in the Resolution field Click Apply and then OK to apply the new screen resolution I...

Page 61: ...ped with activated Windows firewall File transfer via LAN or manual remote operation using the remote desktop requires only a partial exception in the firewall It is advisable to coordinate the configuration of the firewall with the net work administrator The remote control of the instrument via the LAN interface is described in Chapter 6 Remote Control Fundamentals on page 638 2 10 1 Connection t...

Page 62: ...d IP addresses the addresses are mostly assigned by the net work administrator The fixed IP address must be entered in the Windows menu Start Control Panel see Chapter 2 10 2 2 Entering the IP Address on page 47 Point to point connections To set up a simple network a LAN connection between an R S UPP and a computer without integration in a larger network an IP address must be assigned for the R S ...

Page 63: ...detected by the operating system 2 10 2 2 Entering the IP Address By default Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is preset When using Windows XP 1 Click on Start Settings Control Panel 2 Click on Network and Internet Connections and then click on Network Connec tions at the bottom right in this menu 3 Right click in the menu Network Connections Local Area Co...

Page 64: ... mark the Internet Protocol TCP IP selection and then click on Properties 5 In the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties menu enter the IP address in the Use the following IP address field the complete data are available from the net work administrator Complete the entry with OK in all menus Connect R S UPP to a Network LAN ...

Page 65: ...r Manual 1411 1055 32 10 When using Windows 7 1 Open the Control Panel then select Network and Sharing Center 2 Click on Change adapter settings and then right click on Local Area Connection Connect R S UPP to a Network LAN ...

Page 66: ...Use the following IP address and enter the IP address 2 10 2 3 Querying the computer name When using Windows XP 1 Click on Start Control Panel Performance and Maintenance 2 Click on System and select Computer Name in the tab menu The computer name is displayed under Full Computer Name It can be changed in the Change submenu Connect R S UPP to a Network LAN ...

Page 67: ... complex and is generally performed by a network administrator Access from R S UPP to the hard disk of a computer that is also connected to the net work can however be performed relatively easy The directory which the R S UPP is to access simply has to be enabled on the remote computer Access from R S UPP to this directory is done with the help of a Windows search function This procedure is also o...

Page 68: ...er and start the search with Enter The PC is listed with its computer name as the search result 4 Click on the computer name The enabled directory is displayed and the files stored in it can be used in the R S UPP Note If a user name and password are requested when you click the computer the login name and password used on the computer must be entered 2 10 3 Configuration via LXI LAN eXtensions fo...

Page 69: ...additionally equipped with the eight channel hardware trig ger bus LVDS interface defined in the LXI standard Instruments of classes A and B can generate and receive software triggers via LAN messages and communicate with each other without involving the controller The R S UPP meets the general requirements of LXI Class C In addition to the prop erties described above the instrument offers the fol...

Page 70: ...a LCI LAN reset the instrument automatically reboots and starts up with follow ing LAN settings Parameter Setting Hostname RSUPPvvv xxxxxx Description Audio Analyzer TCP IP Mode DHCP Auto IP Address Dynamic DNS Enabled ICMP Ping Enabled Negotiation Auto Detect VXI 11 Discovery Enabled Password for LAN Configuration LxiWebIfc More information about the LXI standard is located on the LXI website und...

Page 71: ...ial number of the instrument The instrument home page shows all important information in a compact form The MAC address and the often dynamically assigned IP address as well as the complete resource string for the remote control via VISA are also located here see also Chap ter 6 Remote Control Fundamentals on page 638 The LAN indicator on the instrument will blink if Device Indicator is set to ACT...

Page 72: ...e version 2 10 3 5 IP Configuration TCP IP Mode decides whether DHCP is switched on or not The IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and DNS Server configuration fields are only enabled if DHCP is disabled Consult the network administrator if it is necessary to modify these settings or any other settings Switching from DHCP enabled mode to manual configuration mode may trigger an instrument resta...

Page 73: ...nistrator if it is necessary to modify this setting when operating with DHCP disabled 2 10 3 6 Advanced LAN Configuration Advanced LAN Configuration provides LAN settings that are not declared mandatory by the LXI standard These advanced parameters should only be modified by experi enced users Negotiation The Negotiation configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex mode setting...

Page 74: ...res The ping utility is not password protected To initiate a ping between the LXI compliant instrument and a second connected instru ment 1 Activate ICMP Ping on the Advanced LAN Configuration page activated after LCI 2 Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and without any further parameters into the Destination Address field e g 10 113 10 203 3 Click on Submit 2 10 4 ...

Page 75: ... 2 3 Querying the computer name on page 50 the login at the external computer for R S UPP was performed with the correct user name instrument and the correct password instrument see Chap ter 2 10 4 2 Starting manual remote operation at the external computer on page 60 2 10 4 1 Activating the Remote Desktop Connection program at the R S UPP Unauthorized access possible to audio analyzer After activ...

Page 76: ...her Windows operating systems from Windows 95 and higher the program can be down loaded free of charge from the Internet http www microsoft com It can be loaded onto any external computer by following the instructions which are also provided on the Internet 1 If necessary install the Remote Desktop Connection program on the external computer 2 Start the program in the Windows menu Start All Progra...

Page 77: ...0 2 3 Query ing the computer name on page 50 The user ID is necessary as it authorizes access to the R S UPP They are preset on the R S UPP and are instrument for both the user name and the password No entry is needed in the Domain field 3 Enter the instrument and user ID on the General tab of the extended Remote Desktop Connection menu called up by pressing the Options button 4 The login data can...

Page 78: ...he audio analyzer screen appears on the external computer Operation is possible with the mouse and or the keyboard If several R S UPPs should be manually remote controlled by one computer a separate Remote Desktop Control window must be opened for every R S UPP This is possible by repeatedly starting the program on the external computer 2 11 Firmware Update The firmware update is described in the ...

Page 79: ...ons exe and C UPP SetReg exe in succession You should now reinstall the firmware If neither of these steps is successful the instrument needs to go in for service or the Windows image program must be reloaded 2 12 Windows XP Recovery and Backup The R S UPP provides an invisible backup and recovery partition A backup of the fac tory system partition C is saved by default and can be restored in case...

Page 80: ...elect the Backup Recovery line 3 Open the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu with ENTER The menu shows the available selections for the recovery and backup partition 2 12 2 Backup Current System Partition 1 In the Windows XP Recovery and Backup Partition menu use the cursor keys to select the Make Backup button 2 Open the Make Backup menu with the ENTER key The menu shows the current ve...

Page 81: ...ery and Backup Partition menu to select the desired version of the system partition 2 Open the Restore Backup menu with the ENTER key The menu shows the versions of the firmware and the software platform of the backup which is displayed in the Select Backup window 3 Select the Select Backup window with the TAB keys 4 Select the backup to be restored with the up down cursor keys and the ENTER key 5...

Page 82: ... performed during recovery is displayed 5 After the restore shut down and switch off the R S UPP The new setting is now active 2 12 5 Deleting Backups Up to five backups in addition to the factory default can be stored on the recovery parti tion To provide space for new backups it might be necessary to remove older back ups The factory default cannot be deleted 1 Use the cursor keys to select the ...

Page 83: ...ecovery and Backup Partition menu opens 9 Select Exit and Shutdown with the cursor keys 10 Exit the menu and shut down the R S UPP by clicking on the ENTER key 2 13 Windows 7 Recovery and Backup The R S UPP provides an invisible backup and recovery partition A backup of the fac tory system partition C is saved by default and can be restored in the event of a system crash In addition backups of mul...

Page 84: ...ows XP it can still be operated in the usual way using an external key board The figures below show the backup recovery system for the R S UPV They are equally valid for the R S UPP The following window is displayed after every boot procedure The user can choose between Firmware and Backup as was the case under Windows XP If no selection is made Firmware is selected automatically after approx 2 se...

Page 85: ...estore a different backup choose the selection list using the Shift TAB key combi nation and select the desired backup using the up down cursor keys Select the Restore Selected field using the TAB key and confirm with ENTER 2 13 4 Creating a User Backup 1 Using the cursor keys select the Create Backup button in the Windows 7 Recov ery and Backup Partition menu 2 Open the Create Backup menu using t...

Page 86: ...tries shown here are intended as examples only the date and time are entered automatically Select the Start Backup button using the TAB keys 4 Confirm using the ENTER key The progress indicator updated in the Capturing WIM Image field shows the status of the backup creation process Windows 7 Recovery and Backup ...

Page 87: ...xactly the same way as a normal backup Take care not to inadvertently delete the factory default Using the TAB keys select the backup to be deleted Then select Delete Selected and confirm with ENTER To exit the Backup and Recovery system select Exit and Reboot and confirm with ENTER The instrument is rebooted Windows 7 Recovery and Backup ...

Page 88: ...s The R S UPP performs all measurements using digital signal processing Here ana log signals to be measured are first subjected to complex preprocessing on analog measurement modules before they are digitalized and fed to the digital measurement routines This concept offers numerous advantages for example The measurement methods at the analog and digital interfaces are identical The measurement fu...

Page 89: ...LR connector Symmetric Bal and asymmetric Unbal output are electronically floating exception Bal with switched on output divider The output can be placed on ground grounding it by connecting Pin 3 to the ground Analyzer Starting with serial numbers 120100 140100 180100 Pin 1 is connected to ground via a capacitor thereby connecting the pin with instrument ground only in relation to HF This avoids ...

Page 90: ... programs in use today It is assumed that the user is familiar with these basic rules This information is therefore not given in detail in this manual The panels the menu bar the buttons of the toolbar and the softkeys varying func tions depending on the application of the R S UPP can be operated manually provi ded that an external monitor keyboard and mouse are connected After being switched on t...

Page 91: ...indows or screens are provided so that the wealth of information can be better organized these windows can be selected via the menu bar Figure 3 1 Screen with the essential elements 1 Menu bar 2 Panel 3 Numeric display 4 Graphical window 5 Toolbar 6 Reduced panels 7 Status bar 8 Softkey bar or WINBAR The softkey bar is always shown at the bottom edge of the window In normal operating mode the soft...

Page 92: ...ving the mouse to Instruments or DispConfig and clicking the desired panel in the pulldown menu that opens Display windows are selected in the same way except that they are listed under the Displays menu item The quickstart panel has a special role and can only be opened by clicking the rocket icon in the toolbar Each panel and display window is a separate window which can be either closed opened ...

Page 93: ...ants to carry out A range of the most important audio measurement tasks are offered depending on the selected outputs and inputs With just a few mouse clicks the audio analyzer is automatically configured such that the desired measurement result appears on the screen numerically as a trace or as a bar graph Some entry fields allow the user to slightly modify the selected measurement function and a...

Page 94: ... the generator outputs that were selected using the combo box 6 If the outputs are on the rear of the instrument Rear appears in red in the image 3 Magnified view of the analyzer inputs that were selected using the combo box 7 If the inputs are on the rear of the instrument Rear appears in red in the image 4 Selected generator outputs on the instrument are highlighted in orange if they are accessi...

Page 95: ...ion depends on the R S UPP audio analyzer and its options The entries are self explanatory Each time the analyzer input is changed the combo box for selecting the desired measurement task 9 is reset and a new measurement task must be selected 8 Symbolic representation of a device under test DUT and its connection to the generator and R S UPP audio analyzer without operating options 9 Combo box for...

Page 96: ...r customizing the analyzer settings Example Switching over the input coupling from AC to DC 12 Entry fields for customizing the graphical display Example Changing the unit on the Y axis 13 Meaning of the buttons from left to right Start continuous measurement Start single measurement Pause continue measurement Switch to expert mode Access to the full range of functions of the audio ana lyzer Autos...

Page 97: ...ay might be differ ent in the user info line line above the softkey bar alerts the user to this as a precau tion Reselecting a Measurement Task will cancel out any inconsistencies in the set tings 3 3 5 Structure of the Panels and Display Windows The R S UPP audio analyzer features the following panels with their main settings for a detailed list of all panels with the most important setting param...

Page 98: ...our of each of these panels are available they contain settings for dis playing measurement values in the graphical windows e g One or two channel display Units scaling grid lines etc Evaluation of minimum and maximum values Entry of limit curves Settings for cursors and markers The measurement results of the audio analyzer are shown in the following display win dows for a detailed list of all pan...

Page 99: ...or value range of menu items which are usually located further down they affect the selec tion or value range in fields located higher up in only a few exceptional cases Sequence Generator Analyzer Measured value display Many setting parameters can be copied to other panels For example the sweep frequency settings can automatically be adopted as the scaling for the graph 3 3 7 Function Selection a...

Page 100: ...tions can be active at any one time Select parameter Clicking on the button next to the current selection displays a selection field The drop down parameter list is displayed below the selection field The selection is made by clicking the desired entry The parameter list can be exited without adopting the highlighted parameter by clicking anywhere on the screen or by pressing the ESC key of the ex...

Page 101: ...ered value is set in the hardware as soon as the numeric entry field is closed Direct mode It is also possible to enter the value in Direct mode Changing to Direct mode is per formed by pressing the ENTER key of the external keyboard the color of the selection frame then changes to magenta A digit can now be entered using the external keyboard the digit at the cursor position is replaced In Direct...

Page 102: ...ed to a text entry field the system enters Edit mode which is indicated by a green selection frame If the complete text e g for graph labels is to be newly entered simply begin entering characters using the external keyboard the old text is deleted automatically when the first key is pressed The backspace delete key can be used during the entry to delete the character to the left right of the curs...

Page 103: ...e units offered in the softkey bar and the limits specified in the Valid Range field always refer to the highlighted parameter field The valid value range is given in the unit currently selected Entries outside the specified value range are not accepted an audible warning is issued and the entry is changed to its permissible minimum or maximum value The specified ranges for value entries always ta...

Page 104: ...eric display field provides a clear overview of the numeric values from various analyzer functions and displays a maximum of 8 numeric value results from the Ana lyzer Function panel The individual columns are permanently assigned from left to right Column 1 Measurement results of the function which is set in the Function field of the Ana lyzer Function panel Column 2 Measurement results for the s...

Page 105: ... tracked even when viewing the screen from a relatively long dis tance The easiest way to open combo displays is by double clicking on the corresponding measurement display in the numeric display field Configuring the Numeric Display Field and Combo Display The settings for the individual columns of the numeric display field or for the combo displays are made in the following four configuration pa...

Page 106: ... graphical windows Sweep Graph FFT Graph Waveform Bar Graph These windows can be set using the associated configuration panels All graphical displays can be evaluated using horizontal and vertical cursors markers are used to identify important measurement points A broad range of softkey control functions can be used to scale graphs to display sections of graphs and to perform many other tasks Brie...

Page 107: ... to set up the measurement and describes how to graphically display the measurement results Finally the example shows how to save the defined measurement setup so that it can be used again for other applica tions 1 Step Loading the factory settings The easiest way to load the factory setting of the instrument is by opening the menu bar with the mouse and clicking on File followed by Preset Load De...

Page 108: ...election b A maximum signal frequency of 22 kHz is generally the correct setting here The following settings are also suitable for the majority of applications and do not have to be adjusted unless necessary This completes the settings in the Generator Config panel c Next the Generator Function panel is activated using the mouse Sine wave signals are required this setting is already selected To be...

Page 109: ... now be specified in the X Axis field Frequency is already preset here as required in this example No other sweep variable is required therefore the Z Axis field also remains unchanged and set to Off The Spacing selection field is used to select the algorithm for advancing through the sweep points This can be done using a linear or logarithmic step size the number of individual sweep points Points...

Page 110: ... completed by pressing the softkey labeled with the desired unit this is a particularly useful feature if a value is to be changed to a different unit The value for the stop frequency is entered in the same way here 20 kHz h The number of desired sweep points must be entered in the Points field 30 points are preset here Up to 1024 points can be selected 50 points are entered in this example This g...

Page 111: ...ary for all channels using the two radio buttons If the coupling is to be set individually for each channel then the AC DC Coupl parameter field must be set to Split The fields for the measurement bandwidth are already preset with the appropri ate setting no prefilter is required here The signal to be measured is fed via the balanced input sockets The auto range function for all channels Range Tra...

Page 112: ...ons If the integrated generator is used for measuring the frequency response as in this example the setting Gen Track should be used The measurement time is then automatically adapted to the frequency generated in the generator The frequency information from the generator is passed on directly to the analyzer The analyzer then adjusts its measurement time to precisely one period or to an integer m...

Page 113: ...d to the reference value set in the Reference field Other parameter fields in this panel are used to set limits and to display extreme values These functions are described in detail in Chapter 4 Manual Operation on page 112 and in Chapter 5 Instrument Functions on page 195 5 Step Starting the sweep Although the analyzer is already supplying measurement results the status mes sage Sweep Waiting abo...

Page 114: ...rom the selection list under the DispConfig button select the Sweep Graph 1 Config panel As explained above the way in which the measurement results are presented is determined in the configura tion panels Each graphical window has its own configuration panel The Sweep Graph 1 Config panel required here has two columns but only Trace A is shown to provide a better overview c The associated graphic...

Page 115: ...ow is also to be used in the graphi cal window the Unit Fnct Track checkbox must be activated If this is not the case a unit can be selected from the parameter list next to the checkbox The Engineering parameter is used to determine whether the display auto matically toggles between µV mV and V for example or whether other unit for mats are desired f All the other default instrument settings are c...

Page 116: ...arithmic step size has been selected for this measurement the x axis should also be subdivided logarithmically 7 Step Using a relative unit in the graphical window The settings so far made allow the frequency response of the DUT to be displayed graphically but not in a way that conforms to standards In the case of frequency response measurement the relevant standards stipulate that the deviations ...

Page 117: ...f 1000 Hz With this setting the value measured at this fre quency is determined if necessary by means of interpolation between the measured values at the two adjacent frequencies and used as the reference value b All that remains is to select the unit dBr in the Unit Fnct Track field All mea sured values are then displayed in dB relative to the reference value selected above This satisfies the sta...

Page 118: ...ble to use this automatic assignment function as it prevents entry errors c If this instrument setup is to be used again at a later time simply open the menu bar and click on File Load Setup to be able to load this setup again in the File window 3 4 2 Measuring Total Harmonic Distortion THD N of a DUT This example is also based on the factory settings of the audio analyzer However only the setting...

Page 119: ...his setting is one of the presets The total harmonic distortion is often only specified for the reference frequency 1 kHz for analog applications Fixed frequencies are therefore used for mea surement as a result Sweep Ctrl must remain set to Off c The frequency 1 kHz is already preset in the default instrument setup Only the output level required for the measurement may have to be adjusted in the ...

Page 120: ...ing THD N is correct for this example d With the THD N measurement the fundamental of the signal to be measured is suppressed using a notch filter The audio analyzer can automatically deter mine the fundamental from the spectrum and adjust the notch filter to it Fun damental Auto Filter and Equalizer are only required in exceptional cases e The calculation for harmonics and noise components can if...

Page 121: ... tion measurements Here however the spectral composition of the output signal at the DUT is also to be analyzed With the audio analyzer it is possible to follow up all distortion measurements with an FFT analysis The necessary settings for this are explained in the following section a In the Analyzer Function panel already used for configuring the THD N mea surement an FFT analysis to be performed...

Page 122: ...le d The associated graphical window can be opened using the Show button in the Display field The window appears in the same screen so that the effect of the following settings can be observed directly e In each FFT window one or two traces Trace A and Trace B can be plotted on the frequency axis In this example the level measurement results of the FFT analysis are to be displayed on a graph For T...

Page 123: ...button to open the graphical window for Post FFT However this displays the window in the same screen without opening the associated configuration panel h The spectral display of the output signal with its harmonics may now look like the example shown below 6 Step Evaluating the graphic with cursors and markers All graphical displays can be evaluated using horizontal and vertical cursors the X and ...

Page 124: ...s the higher level a Setting markers Pressing the Marker button calls up the Marker softkeys which are used in this example to first select Trace A so that markers can be set The next softkey level appears simultaneously The Track to Max button is used to set a marker at the maximum value of the curve i e the fundamental in this example of THD N measurement The Harmonics button is used to mark the...

Page 125: ...X button is used to activate the and X cursor alternately If for example the cursor was activated with the cursor button the following softkeys appear The Vert A button activates a vertical cursor on Trace A this cursor can then be grabbed and moved with the mouse The step size with which the cursor is being moved can be set via additional softkeys of the next level which are called with the Movem...

Page 126: ...ital of the genera tor and analyzer They are stored in the AA AD DA DD subdirectories of the D UPV Setup Examples directory the generator domain is listed first followed by the analyzer domain The file name indicates the respective application Many of these example measurements essentially those at the analog interfaces can be performed using the basic version of the audio analyzer The R S UPP B2 ...

Page 127: ...ettings for digital inputs outputs Both channels are active the generator generates 24 bit words the analyzer ana lyzes 24 audio bits The sampling frequency is set to 48 kHz the Professional for mat acc to AES 3 is used The digital pulse amplitude of the generator is 1 V at the BNC outputs which corresponds to 4 V at the symmetric outputs Levels are mostly given in dBFS audio signals are usually g...

Page 128: ...ortcuts on a computer keyboard and their function for the manual control are listed For additional notes for the control via mouse and key board see Chapter 4 3 2 Operation Using the Mouse on page 120 and Chap ter 4 3 3 Operation Using an External Computer Keyboard on page 120 The use of the toolbar simplifies the operation when using the mouse See Chap ter 4 9 Settings in the Menu Bar on page 170...

Page 129: ... 1 Universal Generator The universal generator consists of an FPGA and generates various test signals from sine wave tones to intermodulation test signals two tone signals to noise signals and multi tones Following appropriate conversion these signal are made available at the analog outputs With the R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces option they can also be output as digi tal data streams in vari...

Page 130: ...gs are made in the Generator Config panel the audio interfaces at which the test signals are to be output the channels which are to be active maximum level and reference values etc 2 In the second step the following settings are made in the Generator Function panel type of test signal output level frequencies etc Functional Division of the Audio Analyzer ...

Page 131: ...asurement functions e g level measurement FFT analysis waveform analysis etc are calculated simultaneously in FPGAs and can therefore be dis played at the same time without a delay The digital measurement routines can continuously adapt their speed to the current input frequency and thus achieve high measurement speeds Since the filters are also digital an almost infinite number of filters is avai...

Page 132: ...ase or group delay can be displayed in a different measurement window parallel to the structure described above The monitor outputs at the rear side of R S UPP allow an oscilloscope or external cir cuits to be connected can be switched to the input monitor level or function level and allow the control of analog or digital input signals as well the different analysis levels directly at the input Wi...

Page 133: ...411 1055 32 10 1 Operation begins in the Analyzer Config panel with the selection of analog or digital input connectors number of channels AC or DC coupling IF bandwidth and a number of other parameters Functional Division of the Audio Analyzer ...

Page 134: ...rder of their importance Measurements at the function level e g distortion measurements possibly with Post FFT enabled Settings at the monitor level e g DC measurement Display of the peak value at the input monitor level Display of frequency phase group delay in the freq phase level In addition the waveform function can be switched on and off in this panel Functional Division of the Audio Analyzer...

Page 135: ...values and many other parameters 4 3 General Information on Operation 4 3 1 Windows User Interface To provide the user with a familiar environment operation is largely based on the Win dows user interfaces All panels entry windows etc are made up of known ele ments for example Selection fields with parameter lists Checkboxes Radio buttons Entry fields A blue green or magenta selection frame or the...

Page 136: ...anently at the top edge of the screen of appear at the right side of the screen as soon as the mouse pointer is moved there In both cases the permanent display is set in the config panel under the heading Always visi ble This toolbar contains a number of icons for calling up frequently used functions The functions of the mouse correspond to the following instrument functions Mouse Function Left cl...

Page 137: ...Switch off all out puts Cursor keys Cursor keys CTRL PAGE UP Scroll screens backward ALT W Switch WINBAR on off Activating windows that are in the background CTRL PAGE DOWN Scroll screen for ward ALT M MODIFY softkey bar for size and position change of windows in predefined increments only with the help of softkey buttons Size and position change using the keys TAB or SHIFT TAB CTRL SHIFT TAB Scro...

Page 138: ... and the measurement results are displayed here To make the various functions of the audio analyzer easier to operate they were organized in a series of panels The measurement results can be displayed as digital numeric values in data lists in analog bar graphs or in result graphics The user can freely choose the number of panels and the number of graphical windows to be shown in the display The s...

Page 139: ... select the desired screen directly by clicking the appropriate number in the toolbar 4 4 2 Softkeys The softkey bar which has a varying range of functions is visible in normal operating mode In most cases the functions available in the selection windows of the panels are dis played in the eight buttons these functions are displayed even if the parameter lists have not yet been opened The labeling...

Page 140: ...button and at the same time use the other softkeys for additional settings If an external computer keyboard is used the softkeys can be operated using the F5 to F12 keys if a mouse is used the buttons in the softkey bar can be clicked directly Function PC keyboard Mouse Select softkey function Press keys F5 to F12 Click button of associated softkey 4 4 3 Moving and Resizing Panels and Graphical Wi...

Page 141: ... presets already config ured Below is an example for entry of the generator output voltage 4 4 4 3 Notes Information concerning the panel settings and so on is also given at the bottom of the screen above the softkey bar only the space above the four left hand softkeys is used 4 4 4 4 Warnings If the user attempts to make measurement settings which conflict with the usual test specifications warni...

Page 142: ...us mea surement functions Combo displays in which the numeric display of measured values can be supple mented by bar graphs min max values and limit monitoring Graphical windows in which measured values are displayed in the form of dia grams Measured value lists in which the measured values are listed in tabular form A detailed list of all panels together with the most important setting parameters...

Page 143: ...keyboard Function Computer keyboard Mouse Open panel Press the shortcut CTRL M to open the menu bar then highlight the Instruments Disp Config or Displays button using the TAB or SHIFT TAB keys open the pull down menu using the Enter key highlight a panel using cursor keys and select it with the Enter key Open the menu bar by moving to left edge of screen press the Instruments Disp Config or Displ...

Page 144: ...umns so that trace 2 does not have to be configured separately Each panel contains a selection of different parameter fields which are combined in groups Various types of parameter fields which are operated in different ways are used The parameter fields have labels indicating their function Panels consist of the following elements Title bar The top field contains the name of the panel here Analyz...

Page 145: ...ry The entry can be completed by selecting the unit using a softkey The unit can be changed after the entry has been made In this case the physical value remains unchanged however the value displayed in the entry field is adapted automatically to the changed unit Text entry field An alphanumeric value e g label text can be entered in this field Button Buttons are used to trigger actions here for e...

Page 146: ...c configuration selected the respective item is disabled and displayed in gray and the field cannot be accessed In this case the field acts as a display field i e the value displayed there corresponds to the value actually set Track box With multi column panels settings can be transferred from the left hand to the right hand column without the parameter having to be entered a second time If the tr...

Page 147: ... Most of the parameters are set in the panels The panels are operated on the screen as described in the section Opening Operating Hiding and Closing Panels How to enter and select setting parameters in the panels is described in the following sections a detailed description of all setting parameters is described in detail in Chapter 5 Instrument Functions on page 195 Entries for file management ta...

Page 148: ... it was before power off The focus is placed on the first position of the active panel Panels are opened using the menu bar see Chapter 4 5 1 Opening Operating Hid ing and Closing Panels on page 126 How to move the focus has already been described earlier see Chapter 4 5 3 Navigating in the Panels on page 131 4 7 2 Changing the Instrument Depending on the installed options the audio analyzer can b...

Page 149: ...erent function is selected The data set is structured differently for each function The data sets differ with regard to the following points Selection of parameter fields parameters Example With the RMS measurement various measurement times are offered which is not the case for the FFT analysis Valid value range of parameters Example Other frequencies can be set for intermodulation test signals th...

Page 150: ... checkbox radio button entry field and so on A control element is activated by shifting the focus to this element The entry focus is indicated by a blue green or magenta border The entry focus is moved with the mouse 4 7 6 Activating Deactivating Functions Checkboxes A checkbox is always used for functions which can be activated and deactivated only If the checkbox is activated the assigned settin...

Page 151: ...cent button displays a selection field As soon as a parameter field has the focus a list for selecting the available parameters can be opened with the ENTER key or by opening a list for selecting provided parameters with a click of the mouse The fold down parameter list is displayed below the selection field When using a mouse items can be selected and activated by clicking on them Only one entry ...

Page 152: ...is displayed above the softkey bar 4 7 9 1 Value Inputs in Edit mode Green Selection Frame When the focus is moved to a numeric entry field the system enters Edit mode which is indicated by a green selection frame In addition the current numeric value is high lighted with a blue background If the value must be completely re entered simply start entering numbers using the external computer keyboard...

Page 153: ...d The cursor does not change its position The digit cursor can be placed at a different position at any time using the cursor keys Digits are then entered at the new position Entries in Direct mode always use the overwrite mode In Direct mode every setting change is immediately passed on to the hardware and executed For this reason this method is particularly suited for adjustment work Direct mode...

Page 154: ...ngs for other parameters The example below explains these interdependencies A reference voltage Ref Voltage can be set in the Generator Config panel The actual output voltage is set in the Generator Function panel where the unit is dBr i e it is possible to enter the output voltage in dB relative to this reference value This method is particularly useful if e g with an A D converter the clipping l...

Page 155: ...w digit directly using the numeric keys All changes are set directly in the hardware Varying a value Direct mode Highlight the numeric entry field switch to Direct mode with the Enter key position the digit cursor with the or cursor keys Change the numeric value with the UP DOWN cursor keys All changes are set directly in the hardware Changing units Highlight the numeric entry field select the uni...

Page 156: ...ete entry with the ENTER key Exiting text entry without adopting the entered characters Press the ESC key Click in a different entry field 4 7 11 Display Fields Sometimes it is very useful for operators to receive additional information about their settings For example the selected FFT parameter directly affects the frequency reso lution in the displayed spectrum Display fields inside the panels a...

Page 157: ...y and cannot be accessed while the track function is active If a setting is changed in the associated parameter field in the left hand column this change is also shown in the display field in the right hand column 4 7 13 Input Help Information on the possible entries is given at the bottom of the screen above the soft key bar The units offered in the softkey bar and the limits specified in the Val...

Page 158: ...uted by the hardware as soon as the radio button is toggled with the ENTER function For operation using a mouse functions are tog gled as soon as the corresponding radio button is clicked A parameter from a selection field is also executed by activating the ENTER function In this case a simple mouse click will select and activate the desired parameter Most settings are made without any noticeable ...

Page 159: ...tput is terminated as soon as the entry is confirmed the newly selected parameters are set and the measurement or output is restarted Sweep activated Since changes to parameters during a sweep can influence the measurement and thus have a negative effect on the reliability of the results displayed in the screen graphics the current sweep is stopped and then restarted for entries of this kind Entri...

Page 160: ... of the individual parameter fields see Chapter 4 8 2 Numeric Display Field on page 144 and Chapter 5 46 Curve Spectrum and Bar Graph Display on page 499 Figure 4 2 Measurements and display of results for audio analyzer What is measured and how the measurement is performed Analyzer Function Type of displays of measurement results Waveform Config Display of measurement results Numeric display and m...

Page 161: ... opened via the menu bar and called up using the Displays button Function Computer keyboard Mouse Opening a numeric display field Press the shortcut CTRL M then highlight the Displays button using the TAB or SHIFT TAB keys open the pulldown menu using the Enter key highlight the numeric display field using cursor keys and select it using the Enter key Open the menu bar by moving to left edge of sc...

Page 162: ...such as analog bar graphs limit monitoring or the storage of maximum and minimum values are frequently required The combo display is used for this purpose Additional information can be displayed for every measurement shown in the numeric display The free selection and free scalability mean that especially important or critical results can be monitored and tracked even when viewing the R S UPP scre...

Page 163: ...ed combo display with CURSOR DOWN or CUR SOR UP and open it with ENTER Click on the Display button in the menu bar then on the desired combo display 4 8 3 2 Settings for measurement result display in combined fields Since a combo display is available for each measurement display of the numeric dis play field up to 32 of these displays can be opened The settings for the combo dis plays and for the ...

Page 164: ...ements on page 575 Some of the settings described below are only visible if the combined display is of ade quate size on the screen For example scaling and grid lines are hidden automatically and stepwise if the display is reduced in size Unit of measurement result This parameter field is used to set the unit for the measurement result display The units available in the parameter list depend in th...

Page 165: ... selected the start and end value of the bar graph must be entered in the two fields If the selected scaling does not encompass all measured values a red arrow indi cates the end of the scale at which the measured value is beyond the range of the bar graph Gridlines The settings Main Grid and Sub Grid are used to subdivide the bar graph Main gridlines which are labeled with the associated numeric ...

Page 166: ...ic display field always behaves in the same way as the measurement display in the combined field current limit violations can therefore also be monitored in the numeric display field Extreme values If this checkbox is activated the lowest and highest measured value is displayed Display of the Min Max values can be set separately for each measurement display and for the two measurement channels The...

Page 167: ...ments over a time axis and so on are just a few examples of the many possible applications The audio analyzer makes a distinction between the graphical windows shown in the fol lowing sections which can be set and modified using the associated configuration pan els All graphical displays can be evaluated using horizontal and vertical cursors markers are used to identify important measurement point...

Page 168: ...erent measurement functions or dis play the same measurement function in a different way 4 8 4 2 FFT Graph In these panels the frequency spectrum of the FFT measurement function or the Post FFT downstream of another measurement function One or two traces TRACE A and TRACE B can be recorded along a frequency axis Each trace can consist of a large number of scans The traces can be saved and saved tr...

Page 169: ... the analyzed audio signal over time is displayed One or two traces TRACE A and TRACE B can be recorded along a time axis The traces can be saved and saved traces ref erence curves and or limit curves can be imported into the graph This graph can be displayed once only it is linked to the Waveform function in the Analyzer Function panel Measurement Displays ...

Page 170: ...lance The bar graph can display one or two channels once again the results can be saved and saved results can be imported into the graph Two bar graphs are available so that for example THD values at two different mea surement points can be displayed or the measured values of both input channels can be shown on two separate graphs 4 8 4 5 Opening graphical windows The graphical windows can be open...

Page 171: ...key Open the menu bar by moving to left edge of screen activate the Displays button and click the desired graphical window Open graphical window via Config panel Highlight the DISPLAY button in the associated Config panel and open the graphical window with the Enter key Click DISPLAY button in associ ated Config panel Open graphical window via Ana lyzer Function panel Highlight SHOW button in Ana ...

Page 172: ... softkeys in graphical window Press F12 key for Settings soft key in respective graphical win dow Click Settings softkey in respec tive graphical window Some of the basic settings in these panels are described here using the FFT Graph1 Config panel as an example For a detailed description of the display options see Chapter 5 46 Curve Spectrum and Bar Graph Display on page 499 Some of the settings ...

Page 173: ...lay fields These fields cannot be accessed while the track function is active If a setting is changed in the associated parameter field in the left hand column this change is also shown in the display field in the right hand column Displayed values The data which is to be graphically displayed can be determined for each trace Usu ally this data comes from the selected measurement functions however...

Page 174: ...lly adapted to the measured value The used unit will appear on the y axis of the graph see example below Sometimes it is better to use a label defined by the user this label can be entered in the parameter field Y axis scaling If the button for automatic scaling is selected the audio analyzer uses the minimum and maximum values of the available measurement cycle to automatically determine a suitab...

Page 175: ... the limit Limit curves appear as a red line on the graph Each measured value which violates a limit is highlighted by a red dot on the curve In addition a red arrow pointing up down in the bottom right hand corner of the graph provides a permanent indication of limit overranging underranging Every restart of a continuous measurement with START resets the limit monitoring again Resetting the limit...

Page 176: ...o be done with the Restart Min Max Lim Violation softkey Settings for the x axis The same rules that apply to the y axis also apply to the settings of the x axis Display of X and Y Values The Resolution field is used to set how many digits are used when displaying values on the x axis and y axis and at the cursor Values in linear units can be displayed with 3 to 7 digits values in logarithmic unit...

Page 177: ...e front panel using the keys F5 to F12 on the external PC key board or by clicking with the mouse The graphics can be scaled or displayed zoomed in sections via softkeys or by using the mouse The basic settings in these functions are described here using examples For a detailed description of the display options see Chapter 5 46 Curve Spectrum and Bar Graph Display on page 499 1 Additional cursor ...

Page 178: ...ton for the y or x axis in the associated configuration panels The All button scales x and y axis simul taneously Operating the cursors Activating the Cursor button displays the cursor softkeys The audio analyzer uses two cursors which are identified by the symbols O and X These symbols indicate the measured point in the graph see the example graph above Only one cursor is active and can be moved ...

Page 179: ...nd line of the label shows the currently set step size in parentheses Moving the Cursor Only one cursor is active and can be moved in the graph at any one time The active cursor is displayed with a solid line the inactive cursor is displayed with a broken line The O X button alternately switches the O and X cursor Alternatively the ENTER key can also be used to switch between cursors In the case o...

Page 180: ...ement point with X and Y value Next Peak Selecting the Next Peak button moves the cursor to the next measured peak with every increment FFT Graph Next Pixel Selecting the Next Pixel button moves the cursor by one pixel in the graphic with every increment With FFT analyses the number of recorded measurement points bins is usually much greater than the number of pixels available for display in the g...

Page 181: ...ves to the next mea sured distortion point harmonic or intermodulation product with each increment The softkey movement indicates the step size All of the step size settings for cursor movement described here only affect the cur rently selected cursor and are only applicable in the selected graphical window This means that when a different cursor is activated or a different graphical window is sel...

Page 182: ... X Curs set the marker to the value of the currently selected cursor Set to Value Sets marker to a value that can be entered later in an input field that appears in the area of the softkeys Track to Max sets a marker at the maximum value of the curve If the maximum value changes the marker is set at the new maximum value Harm marks harmonics of the frequency indicated by the marker If no marker ha...

Page 183: ...eys available here are used to rescale the selected axes if required it is also possible to rescale the axes for certain traces only The initiated action corresponds to that of the Autoscale button in the corresponding configuration panel Restart Min Max Lim Viol function Activating the Restart Min Max Lim Violation button displays another softkey level If the Show Min Max function was selected in...

Page 184: ...a continuous measurement with START and activating the Restart Min Max Lim Violation button resets the limit monitoring 1 Columns with measured values 2 Numbering of measured values 3 Measured value with limit violation 4 Cursor 5 Display for limit violation 6 Display filter Open data list Data lists can be opened via the corresponding configuration panels The associated graphical window is activa...

Page 185: ...or Similarly the step size of cursor movement set via the softkey bar see the previous section also affects the movement of the cursor in the data list Navigating in lists If a mouse is used you can either click the desired value or navigate using the scrollbar As soon as a value has been highlighted in the list with the mouse blue selection frame the up down cursor keys and the TAB Shift TAB keys...

Page 186: ...in a similar way to other Windows appli cations The following settings are made in the menu bar File Preset Load Default To load instrument default settings A dialog box appears with the confirmation query Do you want to preset the device Yes Preset is performed No Cancel LAN Reset Another confirmation query appears Do you really want to reset the LAN Set tings The settings will be set to DHCP Aut...

Page 187: ...t Preview A preview window of the current graphic is displayed here which is shown with the color profile configured for the respective output device From here the actual out put can be initiated or the action can be canceled Exit To exit the R S UPP measurement program Edit Cut To cut characters character strings data etc and transfer them to the clipboard Copy To copy characters character string...

Page 188: ...els are displayed without a suffix closed panels are identified by the suffix closed and open minimized panels by the suffix hidden DispConfig To select the panel used to configure the measurement display windows The desired panel must first be highlighted and is then displayed on the currently selected screen see Chapter 4 5 1 Opening Operating Hiding and Closing Pan els on page 126 In the list o...

Page 189: ...g Panels on page 126 In the list open panels are displayed without a suffix closed panels are identified by the suffix closed and open minimized panels by the suffix hidden Sequence Execute Macro To select sequences macros used to automate previously programmed measure ment procedures to start SCPI Recording Recording of remote control commands to simplify the creation of measurement programs see ...

Page 190: ... mac ros when clicked with the mouse see Chapter 4 10 Settings on the Toolbar on page 176 You can determine these functions in the Quick Launch Config window If a checkbox on the left side is activated the corresponding setup or macro can be executed by means of the shortcut CTRL F11 If several checkboxes were enabled the entries are processed from top to bottom Icons can be randomly defined by th...

Page 191: ...isplayed with additional controls for editing the selected color profile The line colors and types as well as the back ground colors can be set individually Install Options Displays installed options and allows installing software options Utilities Config panel General Configuration settings The R S UPP allows you to have the menu bar and or the toolbar displayed at the top edge or at the right ha...

Page 192: ...r graph displays averaging for measurement results and limit overranging Starts a single measurement or a single sweep Measurement sweep is stopped or continued toggle function Depending on the settings under Utilities in the menu bar Config Panel printout of the screen contents on the connected printer is started or the screen contents are stored in a file Switches all outputs of the measuring in...

Page 193: ...indows easier to use 4 12 Auxiliaries Panel In the Auxiliaries panel the Audio Monitor add on function can be selected for set ting the monitor function for viewing analyzer signals and settings for the trigger output It is divided into the following sections Audio Monitor for configuring the audio monitoring functions Trigger Output for configuring the trigger output at the rear of the instrument...

Page 194: ...BNC socket is assigned to which measurement channel In the Volume field the level at the BNC sockets is set by entering or changing the numeric value in the range from 120 dB to 120 dB The Voltage line sets the DC level at the BNC jacks Alternatively CTRL F9 of the external keyboard can be used to set the level at the BNC sockets A window with a symbolized volume control opens which can be oper at...

Page 195: ...sensitive page it is possible to move to other help pages using the contents list the index scroll arrows and page internal links The Help window is divided into three areas On the left hand side is a column that dis plays either the entire help contents list or the index To the right of that is a large area showing the current help page A mouse is required for operation Function PC keyboard Mouse...

Page 196: ...e loaded in the Generator Function and Ana lyzer Function panels if the appropriate function settings have been made To load settings or to store results the File Select window must be called up in the associated panel using the button 4 15 1 Loading and Saving Instrument Settings With the menu bar and the button File Load Setup Load Example Setup Save Setup as Save Setup or Load Display Plug in t...

Page 197: ...r Function panel Burst duration loaded in the Generator Function panel On Time File menu item Generator voltage loaded in the Volt File or Tot Volt File field depending on the function of the Generator Function panel Files for data or limit lists LIM Limit curve loaded in the configuration panels for measurement windows under Limit Upper and Limit Lower TRC Trace lists for measured values loaded i...

Page 198: ...is started on the external computer by calling up the Remote Desktop Connection program and clicking on the Connect button The R S UPP must be selected as the remote operation device i e its computer name must be displayed in the Computer If the computer has been configured for remote operation of more than one instrument the desired instrument can be selected from the list which is dis played by ...

Page 199: ...r manual remote operation 4 17 Units The R S UPP features two types of units Units for measurement result display In the configuration panels for the measurement displays a display unit must be selected for each measurement function This unit is then used for the measure ment result displayed in the measurement display windows The unit is selected in the Unit fields of the respective panel Units f...

Page 200: ...t result in hex notation All digital analyzer measurement functions usually deliver values ranging from 0 to 1 FS FS values 1 may occur in the following cases In the case of the Peak measurement function with Meas Mode Peak to Peak In the case of a filter with gain e g CCIR wtd is used 4 17 1 3 Units for distortion measurement results Basic unit Units ...

Page 201: ...055 32 10 4 17 1 4 Unit for S N measurement results 4 17 1 5 Units for frequency measurement results Basic unit Hz 4 17 1 6 Units for phase measurement results Basic unit degrees 4 17 1 7 Units for group delay measurement results Basic unit s Units ...

Page 202: ...ries To simplify matters In the following conversion formulas the entry values are designa ted by the unit only Example dBu means value in dBu Absolute analog level units without reference Relative analog level units with reference Absolute digital level units without reference Units ...

Page 203: ... 1055 32 10 Relative digital level units with reference Absolute time units Absolute frequency units Relative frequency units with reference Absolute phase units Deviations tolerance relative to previous measured values in settling function Units ...

Page 204: ...ys averaging for mea surement results and limit overranging CTRL F6 Starts a single measurement or a single sweep CTRL F7 Measurement sweep is stopped or continued toggle function CTRL F8 Switches the audio monitor on and off toggle function CTRL F9 Opens closes the window for adjusting the audio monitoring volume CTRL P Depending on the settings under Utilities printout of the screen con tents on...

Page 205: ...entry a to z 0 SPACE Number entry 0 Entry of a space Entry of a period decimal point Entry of special characters SHIFT A to Z Entry of sign Switchover between uppercase and lowercase letters Table 4 5 VARIATION panel Key of the PC keyboard Operation with mouse Function CTRL M Displays the menu bar on the screen BACKSPACE Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Undoes the action last perfor...

Page 206: ...T C Closes the active panel or graphical window F1 Opens and closes the context sensitive help function ALT S Opens a panel for storing instrument settings ALT L Opens a panel for loading predefined instrument settings ALT P Loads the factory settings of the instrument 4 19 Overview of Panels and Measurement Displays Graphical Windows Panels which can be selected via the Instruments menu bar butto...

Page 207: ... displays Settings for limits minimum values and maximum values Level Monitor Config Settings for numeric measured values of level monitor in numeric display field Settings for associated combo displays Settings for limits minimum values and maximum values Input Config Settings for measured values of input monitor in numeric display field Settings for associated combo displays Settings for limits ...

Page 208: ...c value plus the following additional features Analog bar graphs Monitoring and display of limits Storage of minimum and maximum values The measurement results are displayed in the way defined in the configura tion panel Lev Mon Ch1 to 2 Lev Mon These combo displays are extensions to the numeric measurement display of the level monitor selected in the Analyzer Function panel they show the respecti...

Page 209: ... the selected measurement function One channel or two channel graphical display The measurement results are displayed in the manner defined in the respective Bar Graph 1 to 2 Config configuration panel 4 20 Overview of Status Messages The status of the R S UPP is continuously displayed for the generator analyzer sweep system and other instrument states at the bottom of the screen in four fields ab...

Page 210: ...e measurement has been terminated Stopped Measurement has been stopped Wait for Trigger Analyzer is waiting for set trigger condition Generator status Gen Off Generator is deactivated Gen Running Generator signals are being output Output Off All output lines are deactivated Gen Overload Generator has been deactivated owing to overload Sweep status Sweep Off No sweep is being performed Sweep Waitin...

Page 211: ...e user has access to a universal generator for almost any signal form up to 80 kHz If the option R S UPP B8 multichannel audio generator is installed 8 channels are available whose signals can be set individually for each channel using the Universal generator function Digital Audio Select digital audio generator Generating audio data in AES EBU or SPDIF format I2S Select I2S generator The I2S gene...

Page 212: ...r are described below Channel Selection of the signal carrying XLR plugs on the front panel of the R S UPP Selection of the channels on the 25 pin D Sub socket with the setting Multi if the R S UPP B8 option multichannel audio generator is installed OFF Both XLR plugs are deactivated 1 XLR plug 1 supplies the generator signal XLR plug 2 is deactivated 2 XLR plug 2 supplies the generator signal XLR...

Page 213: ...of the respectively active generator channel Free selection of channels 3 to 10 is possible if the R S UPP B8 option multichannel audio generator is installed and Multi was selected in the parameter field above The eight generator outputs are labeled Ch3 to Ch10 to prevent mix ups with channels 1 and 2 of the universal generator Remote command OUTPut MCHannels n2 on page 693 Output Type The genera...

Page 214: ...quency 22 kHz The maximum output frequency is 21 75 kHz The generator DAC is clocked at 48 kHz 40 kHz The maximum output frequency is 40 kHz The generator DAC is clocked at 96 kHz 80 kHz The maximum output frequency is 80 kHz The generator DAC is clocked at 192 kHz Play Auto For the Play generator function only The bandwidth is automatically determined as a function of the sample rate entered in t...

Page 215: ...put voltage prevents excessively high voltage values from being entered inadvertently in the Generator Function panel It is not possible to configure a higher voltage in the Generator Function panel than the one specified here The RMS value for sinusoidal signals is entered i e the maximum peak value is higher by a factor of Remote command SOURce VOLTage MAXimum on page 690 Ref Voltage Reference v...

Page 216: ...gain by the user Remote command SOURce FREQuency REFerence on page 689 5 2 2 Outputs of the universal generator The outputs of the analog R S UPP generator can be configured in various ways with regard to Channel and Output Type see the previous chapter From serial numbers 120100 140100 180100 and higher the output impedance can be switched between 25 Ω and 600 Ω previously the impedance was perma...

Page 217: ...pplied by two independent sources The selected output impedance is retained even if the output is deactivated XLR Pin 3 is set to 0 V electronically floating Balanced Output Output Type Bal The balanced output signal is applied between Pin 2 and Pin 3 of the XLR plug Pin 1 is not connected The source impedance consists of two identical resistors in both sig nal lines Configuring Analog Generator ...

Page 218: ...s the R S UPP housing ground Figure 5 3 Balanced Output As can be seen in the circuit diagram the two generator outputs are supplied by two independent sources The selected output impedance is retained even if the output is deactivated The above illustration applies for all generator functions Configuring Analog Generator ...

Page 219: ...s available whose 8 out puts have been brought out to the pins of a 25 pin D Sub socket As an accessory for the R S UPP B8 option multichannel audio generator a break out cable with a 25 pin D Sub connector on the one end and eight XLR connectors on the other end is available R S UP Z8A option refer to data sheet for the order num ber The pin assignment corresponds to the TASCAM DB 25 Pinout Stand...

Page 220: ...ta sheet for order number Pin 3 of all 8 XLR connectors is also electronically floating 5 2 6 Output Power of the Analog Multichannel Generator The output amplifier attenuator and all internal resistors are short circuit proof The peak value of the current is limited to a maximum of approx 30 mA With a maximum RMS value of 7 V unbalanced the maximum power dissipation in the load resistor with a sh...

Page 221: ...tal audio generator are described below Channel Selection of the left and right digital audio channels OFF Both channels are deactivated The frequency and level setting of the channels have no effect A blank frame is generated that does not contain any audio data 1 The left channel supplies the generator signal the right channel is deactivated 2 The right channel supplies the generator signal the ...

Page 222: ...ls is offered if the option R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interfaces has been installed for 8 channel Digital Audio generation or the option R S UPP B8 multichannel audio generator is installed and Multi has been selected The corresponding generator channel is switched on or off Remote command OUTPut MCHannels n2 on page 693 Sync To Used to select the source to which the digital audio generato...

Page 223: ...l Ext Inv Clock Synchronizes to an inverted clock signal The feed of the inverted clock signal depends on the option see the description under Ext DARS The sampling rate of the generator is determined by the frequency of the supplied clock signal Remote command SOURce SYNC TO on page 692 Sync Input This parameter field appears with the installed R S UPP B2 option digital audio inter faces and dete...

Page 224: ... signal frequency which can be input For sine wave signals it is 49 9 of the sampling rate If the sample frequency entered does not match the actual clock rate e g with external synchronization all audio data signals shift accordingly in frequency This setting is also used to select the correct range for the Sync PLL Value range for numeric input 30 kHz 200 kHz Standard sampling frequencies can be...

Page 225: ...IEC 60958 4 or AES3 for Professional Mode Open the control panel for the digital audio protocol generator by means of the Show button Alternatively this panel can also be opened via the Menu bar Instruments Protocol Generator Bal Ampl Only with option R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces Used to set the pulse amplitude of the digital audio signal at the BAL output The con figured voltage correspond...

Page 226: ...ve frequency units If the reference frequency is changed all frequency settings linked to the reference value also change Remote command SOURce FREQuency REFerence on page 689 5 3 2 Interface Assignment 5 3 2 1 R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces Use of the R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces option for 2 channel generation and analysis DIGITAL OUT BNC output for the SPDIF or AES EBU format accord...

Page 227: ...BNC output for the SPDIF or AES EBU format according to EIAJ CP 340 and optical output according to TOSLINK system DIGITAL IN BNC input for the SPDIF or AES EBU format according to EIAJ CP 340 and optical input according to TOSLINK system SYNC IN BNC input for synchronization signals with switchable termination 5 3 2 3 R S UPP B8 multichannel audio generator When using the R S UPP B8 option multic...

Page 228: ...ve BNC connectors on the other side is available optional R S UP Z8D refer to data sheet for Order No 5 4 Configuring the I2S Generator 5 4 1 I2S Generator Configuration Panel The I2S generator instrument requires the R S UPP B2 option digital audio inter face or the R S UPP B4 option HDMI and digital audio interfaces for 2 channel and 8 channel I2S generation respectively Configuring the I2S Gene...

Page 229: ...l 2 Only the right channel supplies the generator signal the left channel is deactivated all bits null 2 1 Both channels left and right return the same output signal Multi This selection item is offered only if the R S UPP B4 HDMI and digi tal audio interface option for 8 channel I2S generation is installed and enables the free configuration of up to 8 channels in the following parameter fields Re...

Page 230: ...eq f MCLK MClk Ratio Ext Wordclk Synchronizes to the external word clock supplied at the BNC jack SYNC IN of the R S UPP B2 B4 option The sampling rate of the generator corresponds directly to the frequency of the supplied clock signal Remote command SOURce SYNC TO on page 692 Word Length Word width of one data frame per channel in bits Remote command OUTPut WLENgth on page 694 Audio Bits Word wid...

Page 231: ...nerates audio data with an incorrect frequency The selected clock rate determines the maximum signal frequency which can be input For sine wave signals this is 49 9 of the sampling rate The standard sampling frequencies can be set directly in the selection field The selection item Value permits the variable input of the sampling rate in the follow ing line Value range for numeric input 6 75 kHz to...

Page 232: ...smits in the standard I2S format The following parameters that have an effect on the format have fixed default settings First Bit MSB Fsync Shape Square Pulse Fsync Polarity Left 1 Low Word Offset 1 User Def The I2S generator transmits in a format similar to I2S The following parameters are additionally available First Bit Fsync Shape Fsync Polarity Word Offset Remote command OUTPut FORMat on page...

Page 233: ...annel 1 is being sent a high level is applied at the FSYNC signal at a word offset of 0 Positive Fsync Shape Bit Pulse At a Word Offset of 0 a positive pulse marks the beginning of the left data word Negative Fsync Shape Bit Pulse At a Word Offset of 0 a negative pulse marks the beginning of the left data word Remote command OUTPut POLarity on page 694 Word Offset By using Word Offset you can set ...

Page 234: ...ncy units If case of a change all frequency settings linked to the reference frequency also change Remote command SOURce FREQuency REFerence on page 689 5 4 2 Timing Diagrams The timing diagrams below show a number of configuration examples that illustrate the effect of the parameters Configuring the I2S Generator ...

Page 235: ... connector of the R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces option Connection Signal I nput O utput Description 1 GND Ground terminal 2 GND Ground terminal 3 GND Ground terminal 4 GND Ground terminal 5 GND Ground terminal 6 GND Ground terminal 7 GND Ground terminal 8 GND Ground terminal Configuring the I2S Generator ...

Page 236: ...er 17 RX_DATA I Serial Data Analyzer 18 not connected 19 3 3 V 500 mA O Power Supply 20 5 V 500 mA O Power Supply 21 not connected 22 TX_DATA O Serial Data Generator 23 TX_FSYNC O Frame Sync Generator 24 TX_SCK O Serial Clock Generator 25 TX_MCLK O Master Clock Output Generator I2S plug 26 pin D SUB HD connector of the R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interfaces option Connection Signal I nput O ...

Page 237: ...ync Analyzer 15 RX DATA Ch 1 2 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 1 2 16 RX DATA Ch 3 4 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 3 4 17 RX DATA Ch 5 6 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 5 6 18 RX DATA Ch 7 8 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 7 8 19 GND Ground terminal 20 GND Ground terminal 21 GND Ground terminal 22 GND Ground terminal 23 GND Ground terminal 24 GND Ground terminal 25 GND Ground terminal 26 GND Ground terminal SYNC IN BNC...

Page 238: ...asterclk or Ext Wordclk 5 5 Configure HDMI Generator 5 5 1 HDMI Generator Configuration Panel The HDMI generator instrument requires the R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interfaces options SCPI command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 The Config panel enables the settings of the digital HDMI generator which is described below Configure HDMI Generator ...

Page 239: ...be generated internally Aux In The AUX IN socket can be used to supply externally generated video data combined with the internally generated audio signals and output via the SOURCE socket Remote command SOURce HDMI VIDeo SOURce on page 696 Format Resol This selection describes the horizontal and vertical resolution as well as the aspect ratio of the created video format according to the CEA 861 s...

Page 240: ...ome A monochrome picture content with selectable color depth is being generated Lip Sync Available only with the R S UPP K45 expanded audio video mea surements option The Lip Sync selection in conjunction with Source Internal restricts the availability of the generator functions to the Lip Sync function and adjusts it A selectable trigger pattern with defined time reference to the audio data is ge...

Page 241: ...eric values With a lower color depth in the Color Depth selection field the corresponding LSBs are not trans mitted but set to 0 RGB string If Pattern Monochrome was selected the color selection from the color selection dialog above is mapped as RGB string and can be configured here if necessary In each case the decimal equivalent of 12 bit long numeric values is mapped With a lower color depth in...

Page 242: ...dialog in which the currently set MPEG info frame of the generator is shown The data structure of this Info Frame is specified in the CEA 861 standard Vendor Info Frame Available only with the R S UPP K45 expanded audio video measurements option Opens a dialog in which the currently set vendor specific info frame of the generator is shown The data structure of this Info Frame is specified in the C...

Page 243: ... formats OFF All channels are switched off The frequency and level setting of the channels have no effect Zero samples are being generated 1 Only the left channel supplies the generator signal the right channel is deactivated all bits null 2 Only the right channel supplies the generator signal the left channel is deactivated all bits null 2 1 Left and right channel furnish the same output signal M...

Page 244: ... page 691 Sample Freq Selecting of the sampling rate of the generated audio data Fixed frequen cies The permissible scanning rates depend on the selected audio for mat and the video Format Resol For the audio format PCM 8Ch Lay1 the selected video Format Resol determines the permissible sample frequencies only they will be offered For all other audio for mats sample frequencies in the range from 3...

Page 245: ...ly with the R S UPP K45 expanded audio video measurements option Opens a dialog in which audio relevant information of the HDMI stream header can be displayed and changed This data structure consists of the channel status bytes 0 to 4 of a consumer format according to IEC 60958 Ref Voltage Reference value for the relative amplitude units If this reference value is changed all amplitude settings li...

Page 246: ...MDS Data2 13 CEC 4 TMDS Data1 14 Reserved HDMI 1 0 1 3c HEC Data Optional HDMI 1 4 with Ethernet 5 TMDS Data1 Shield 15 SCL I C Serial Clock for DDC 6 TMDS Data1 16 SDA I C Serial Data Line for DDC 7 TMDS Data0 17 DDC CEC HEC Ground 8 TMDS Data0 Shield 18 5 V Power max 50 mA 9 TMDS Data0 19 Hot Plug Detect all versions HEC Data Optional HDMI 1 4 with Ether net 10 TMDS Clock 5 5 4 Interface Assignm...

Page 247: ...2 10 Pin Signal 1 TX 2 TX 3 RX 4 NC 5 NC 6 RX 7 NC 8 NC 5 5 5 HEAC Support The HDMI generator supports the Audio Return Channel ARC as well as the HDMI Ethernet Channel HEC The following block diagram illustrates the internal wiring Configure HDMI Generator ...

Page 248: ... Ethernet functionality of a device under test the HEC Source RJ 45 socket can be used 5 6 Generator Signals The section Generator Signals describes the setting parameters for all signals which can be generated at the analog or digital outputs The signals are selected using the Function selection field in the Generator Function panel The selected function determines which parameter fields are avai...

Page 249: ...e wave signal Frequency and level are the same for both channels Function Selects the sine signal Remote command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 SINE Dither In the digital generator a noise component with adjustable amplitude can be superim posed on the signal The checkbox enables or disables this function The parameter fields for Dither do not appear in the analog generator Remote command SOURce SINu...

Page 250: ...sary the generator frequency is modified slightly Remote command SOURce FREQuency n2 on page 697 Voltage Used to set the level of the sine wave The maximum value depends on the configured DC offset In the analog generator the maximum total voltage also depends on the set tings for Output Type and Max Voltage in the Generator Config panel Remote command SOURce VOLTage n2 on page 699 Signal change a...

Page 251: ...Channel 1 and 2 Function Selects the stereo sine signal Remote command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 STEReo Dither In the digital generator a noise component with adjustable amplitude can be superim posed on the signal The checkbox enables or disables this function The Dither setting is the same for both channels The parameter fields for Dither do not appear in the analog generator Remote command SO...

Page 252: ...s swept but Channel 2 remains unchanged Remote command SOURce VOLTage SELect on page 703 Sweep Ctrl Used to activate the sweep system The frequency phase or level of the signal can be varied within a selectable range from the start to the stop value The Freq Mode and Volt Mode settings determine how frequencies and levels are changed during the sweep If frequency phase or level is selected as the ...

Page 253: ...ted as the measurement time in the analyzer measurement channel 2 follows the frequency of generator channel 2 If necessary the generator fre quency is modified slightly so that the signal periods measured during the measure ment time contain a sufficient number of samples Remote command SOURce FREQuency CH2Stereo on page 701 Volt Ch2 Level of Channel 2 Volt Mode Ch1 2 Remote command SOURce VOLTag...

Page 254: ...n page 468 Filter Ch2 Filter for channel 2 if Split filter was selected The generator signal is filtered in the time domain One of the user definable filters in the Filter panel or a weighting filter can be selected All level settings apply to the unfil tered signal Remote command SOURce STEReo n2 FILTer on page 777 Equalizer The equalizer can be selected for both channels together Track or separa...

Page 255: ...emote command MMEMory LOAD STEReo n3 OEQualize on page 701 SOURce VOLTage STEReo n3 EQUalize on page 703 DC Offset A DC offset is superimposed on the generator signal The DC offset decreases the maximum AC voltage The checkbox enables or disables this function The value con figured for the offset voltage is always displayed Remote command SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 STATe on page 700 DC Offset The DC...

Page 256: ...g rate 262144 Anl Trk The frequency grid is adopted from the FFT set in the analyzer This value depends on the sampling rate and the size of the FFT This set ting is only possible if an FFT or Post FFT is selected in the analyzer The parameter field for entering values is then hidden Remote command SOURce RANDom SPACing MODE on page 704 SOURce RANDom SPACing FREQuency on page 704 Voltage Mode Used...

Page 257: ...tion of the other ones is ignored and represented as non changeable Remote command SOURce PHASe n2 on page 702 Volt No i Used to set the voltage of sine wave number i of the multisine wave signal The maxi mum value depends on the configured DC offset In the analog generator the maxi mum total voltage also depends on the settings Output Type on page 197 and Max Voltage on page 199 in the Generator ...

Page 258: ... the frequency domain using the file selected in the Equal File parameter field see Chapter 5 7 Equalization on page 279 DC Offset A DC offset is superimposed on the generator signal The DC offset decreases the maximum AC voltage The checkbox enables or disables this function The value con figured for the offset voltage is always displayed Remote command SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 STATe on page 700 ...

Page 259: ...ement time of the analyzer All setting parameters of the sweep system are described in detail in Chapter 5 9 Sweeps on page 285 Frequency Used to set the frequency of the sine wave The value range depends on the analog bandwidth set in the Generator Config panel or the digital clock rate Remote command SOURce FREQuency n2 on page 697 Voltage Used to set the level of the sine wave during the burst ...

Page 260: ...Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 Equalizer The generator signal is equalized in the frequency domain using the file selected in the Equal File parameter field The checkbox enables or disables this function The button opens a browser in which you can select the equalizer file refer also to Chapter 5 7 Equalization on page 279 Remote command SOURce VOLTage EQUalize on page 699 MMEMory LOAD OE...

Page 261: ...ed signal to wanted signal must be 4 1 according to IEC 268 3 a ratio of 10 1 is also possible Panel of digital generator with Mod Dist function selected Function Selects the Mod Dist test signal Remote command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 MDISt Dither In the digital generator a noise component with adjustable amplitude can be superim posed on the signal The checkbox enables or disables this functi...

Page 262: ...t the level ratio of unwanted signal to wanted signal as a dimension less number Remote command SOURce VOLTage RATio on page 702 Total Voltage Used to set the level of the overall signal The maximum RMS value depends on the level ratio The maximum value depends on the configured DC offset In the analog generator the maximum total voltage also depends on the settings for Output Type and Max Voltage...

Page 263: ...cordance with IEC 118 or 268 The signal consists of two close sine waves of the same amplitude Panel of digital generator with DFD function selected Function Selects the DFD test signal Remote command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 DFD Mode Used to select the entry mode for the frequencies of both signals IEC 268 Entry of center frequency Mean Freq and difference frequency Diff Freq If a frequency sw...

Page 264: ...en Start and Stop or read out of the file Forwarding Automatic in a defined timeframe or synchronized to the measurement time of the analyzer All setting parameters of the sweep system are described in detail in Chapter 5 9 Sweeps on page 285 Remote command SOURce SWEep CONTrol on page 718 Mean Freq Used to set the center frequency in the IEC 268 mode Remote command SOURce FREQuency MEAN on page 7...

Page 265: ...arameter field The checkbox enables or disables this function The button opens a browser in which you can select the equalizer file refer also to Chapter 5 7 Equalization on page 279 Remote command SOURce VOLTage EQUalize on page 699 MMEMory LOAD OEQualize on page 697 DC Offset A DC offset is superimposed on the generator signal The DC offset decreases the maximum AC voltage The checkbox enables o...

Page 266: ... selectivity of one line with the square wave window This type of generator analyzer configuration allows frequency responses of DUTs to be deter mined in one go with high precision and selectivity Function Selects the random noise signal Remote command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 RANDom Shape Defines the amplitude distribution of the signal spectrum within a selectable frequency domain White Time...

Page 267: ...r that you can use to select the file File format ASCII file containing max 8192 amplitude values which have to be entered as a sequence of numbers value range FLOAT The file must contain one line with the keyword FREQUENCY_FILE before the number sequence Comment lines must begin with and can be used anywhere in the file No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase characters The recomme...

Page 268: ...ttling time After Meas The generator signal is switched off when the single measurement is completed When a continuous measurement is in progress the generator signal also remains on continuously This setting is necessary if the measurement function or the DUT requires a low level before the start of measurement e g with the R S UPP measurement function Delay When the measurement is started the ge...

Page 269: ...Cing MODE on page 704 SOURce RANDom SPACing FREQuency on page 704 Lower Freq Used to define the lower frequency limit of the noise signal if Shape is set to White or Pink Remote command SOURce RANDom FREQuency LOWer on page 707 Upper Freq Used to define the upper frequency limit of the noise signal if Shape is set to White or Pink Remote command SOURce RANDom FREQuency UPPer on page 707 Mean Freq ...

Page 270: ...and their setting parameters see Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 Equalizer The generator signal is equalized in the frequency domain using the file selected in the Equal File parameter field The checkbox enables or disables this function These parameter fields are hidden if time domain noise Domain Time is selected The button opens a browser in which you can select the equalizer file refer...

Page 271: ...288 512 k samples The individual samples are entered as a sequence of numbers value range 1 0 to 1 0 The file must contain one line with the keyword TIMETAB_FILE before the number sequence Comment lines must begin with and can be used anywhere in the file No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase characters The recommended and preset file extension is ARB However due to the keyword TI...

Page 272: ...g filter can be selected All level settings apply to the unfil tered signal Remote command SOURce FILTer on page 776 For a description of the filters and their setting parameters see Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 DC Offset A DC offset is superimposed on the generator signal The DC offset decreases the maximum AC voltage The checkbox enables or disables this function The value con figured...

Page 273: ...reviously analog sample signal can be examined lossless for example during offline analysis via one of the optional R S UPP digital interfaces Playback starts immediately after the WAV file has been successfully loaded Every time a generator setting is changed or START is pressed playback restarts Panel of the analog generator for the Play function This panel also displays information about the WA...

Page 274: ...mpling rates e g 44 1 kHz in the analog generator Remote command MMEMory LOAD ARBitrary on page 708 Scale Pk to FS Enables optional scaling up of samples to obtain full control This parameter field does not appear if coded audio formats are played back see note Audio Format on page 226 Deactivated The samples from the WAV file are output without change This mode enables the WAV file to be loaded f...

Page 275: ...ignal is no longer needed Off The generator signal always remains switched on independently of the measurement This setting is necessary if the generator is opera tion without the analyzer or if the DUT requires a long settling time After Meas The generator signal is switched off when the single measurement is completed When a continuous measurement is in progress the generator signal also remains...

Page 276: ...ing of the file with out interruption Note During the jump back the signal normally becomes discontinu ous which for pure sine wave signals is visible as noise in the spec trum close to the carrier Total Single The complete WAV file is played back once after which the generator is muted Time Cont The beginning of the WAV file is played back in a loop After the play back time expires playback jumps...

Page 277: ...r Config panel This parameter field does not appear if coded audio formats are played back see note Audio Format on page 226 Ch2 1 The level of channel 2 is at a fixed ratio to the level of channel 1 and can be set as a factor with the command Volt Ch2 1 Ch1 2 The level can be set separately for Channel 1 and 2 Remote command SOURce VOLTage SELect on page 703 Volt Peak Ch1 Level of Channel 1 This ...

Page 278: ...pear if coded audio formats are played back see note Audio Format on page 226 The generator signal is filtered in the time domain One of the user definable filters in the Filter panel or a weighting filter can be selected All level settings apply to the unfil tered signal Remote command SOURce FILTer on page 776 For a description of the filters and their setting parameters see Chapter 5 39 4 Filte...

Page 279: ... of the input signal transmitted by the DUT The test signal consists of two sine waves one of which is a fundamental and the other a harmonic having the same amplitude in each case The phase of the harmonic is selected so that the positive peak value is greater than the negative Function Selects the test signal for polarity measurements Remote command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 POLarity Frequency...

Page 280: ...el is selected as the x axis the mea sured values can be displayed as a curve in the Sweep Graph graphical window Sweep points Linear or logarithmic between Start and Stop or read out of the file Forwarding Automatic in a defined timeframe or synchronized to the measurement time of the analyzer All setting parameters of the sweep system are described see Chapter 5 9 Sweeps on page 285 Remote comma...

Page 281: ... ment for the chirp based measurement Chapter 5 29 Chirp Based Measurement on page 423 A positive chirp must be used as the excitation signal for the chirp based measure ment i e the frequency must increase regarding time As a result the Start Freq must always be less than the Stop Freq Function Selects a chirp signal Remote command SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 CHIRp Play Mode Determines the playba...

Page 282: ...req Remote command SOURce SWEep FREQuency STARt on page 719 Stop Freq Stop frequency of the logarithmic sine wave sweep Remote command SOURce SWEep FREQuency STOP on page 719 Volt Peak Peak value of the chirp Changing this value results in a change to the RMS value in the next operator field Remote command SOURce VOLTage TOTal on page 704 Volt RMS RMS value of the chirp over the sweep time to be s...

Page 283: ... Filter panel or a weighting filter can be selected All level settings apply to the unfiltered signal Remote command SOURce FILTer on page 776 For a description of the filters and their setting parameters see Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 Equalizer The generator signal is equalized in the frequency domain using the file selected in the Equal File parameter field see Chapter 5 7 Equalizat...

Page 284: ...and digital audio interfaces and the 8 channel HDMI generator instrument The Universal function provides a generator signal for 2 or 8 channels this signal is configured using common settings for all channels and individually for each channel The corresponding panel areas are identified by the headings All Channel Settings and Single Channel Settings Common to all channels is a noise signal dither...

Page 285: ... a level adjustment attenuation or gain of the overall signal with the Total Gain parameter field up to a maximum of 1 FS or up to the maximum voltage If the level of a signal component that caused the overall signal to be cut is reduced again then the Total Gain value that led to the attenuation of the overall sig nal is retained This behavior applies equally to all signal components and is not m...

Page 286: ...eter field Remote command SOURce ACHSine STATe on page 711 Arbitrary Mode Operating mode of the arbitrary signal components ARB and WAV files within the uni versal generator function Total Cont All active arbitrary signal components are played back with the same fixed playback time The fixed playback time is yielded by the longest sum of active arbitrary files and the associated delay The time is ...

Page 287: ...tion The generator is restarted only by the Start button or by selecting Restart Once Auto The generator and the measurement is restarted The generator is automatically restarted upon pressing the Start button or changing the generator s signal form or configuration Level settings are execu ted without restarting likewise by pressing the Single button Once The generator and the measurement is star...

Page 288: ...e Used to set the level of the higher level sine wave A percentage of this level which can be set via the Gain parameter field can be added to the overall signal If the level of the higher level sine wave is changed it affects the individual channels equally according to the Gain factor This parameter field appears only if the checkmark of All Chan Sine in the All Chan nel Settings panel area is s...

Page 289: ...k to other channels parameter field above it is deactivated The value designates one of 8 channels whose parameter set is displayed below Channel in the panel Changes to these parameters concern only the channel indica ted here Changing the number in this field allows a quick overview of the parameters of all channels Remote command SOURce SCHSettings CHANnel on page 715 Filter The overall signal ...

Page 290: ...4 Voltage Level of the channel based sine wave signal Remote command SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE VOLTage on page 714 Equalizer The content of the equalization file affects the adjustable level range of the channel based sine wave If the selection of Equalization results in a level increase it leads to the cutoff of level values if the overall signal of 1 FS is exceeded The channel based sine wave sign...

Page 291: ...l and can be used for example to compensate for sound propagation times Remote command SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE ARBitrary DELay on page 713 Time Only available if Arbitrary Mode in the upper part of the panel is set to Time manual Time is higher level for all channels and indicates how long the arbitrary file is played back If the playback time of the file content is the same or longer than this ti...

Page 292: ...verall signal in the indicated channel The following Gain parameter field serves as default setting and takes effect only if the checkmark is set Activated The higher level sine wave is added to the overall signal in a percent age that is determined with the following Gain parameter field Remote command SOURce MCHannel n2 ACHSine STATe on page 712 SOURce MCHannel n2 GAIN on page 713 Gain If the Al...

Page 293: ...on expanded audio video measurements The Lip Sync generator function is automatically activated if Video Source is set to Intern and Pattern to Lip Sync in the HDMI generator The Lip Sync generator function generates a sine burst signal of variable frequency length periodicity and amplitude With the start of the burst signal the picture content of the HDMI signal is set to the color of the Audio A...

Page 294: ... Amplitude of the sine burst Remote command SOURce VOLTage n2 on page 699 On Time Determines the periodicity of Lip Sync pattern together with the Meas Time set in the corresponding analyzer measuring function Lip Sync The following illustration shows the time association Remote command SOURce ONTime on page 705 Mute Color Color to be output if no audio data are present The color can be configured...

Page 295: ...field the corresponding LSBs are not transferred but set to 0 RGB String Color to be output if audio data are output The color selection from the above color selection dialog above is mapped as RGB string and can be configured here if necessary In each case the decimal equivalent of 12 bit long numeric values is mapped With a lower color depth in the Color Depth selection field the corresponding L...

Page 296: ...er Mode and IEC 60958 4 or AES3 for the Professional Mode The R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interface option in conjunction with the R S UPP K21 digital audio protocol option enables the Digital Audio genera tor instrument to be used for generating and analyzing the channel status data in the data stream of the digital audio interface according to the IEC 60958 3 standard for the Consumer Mode...

Page 297: ...button Coding Mode This is for setting the input dialog for channel status data to Consumer or Professional Automatic The dialog is set depending on Bit 0 in Byte 0 The settings for sample frequency and audio bits in the generator config panel are transferred to the protocol data Bit 0 0 Consumer Bit 0 1 Professional Consumer Entry mask for the Consumer mode Professional Entry mask for the Profess...

Page 298: ...er D UPV USER Remote command SOURce PROTocol FILE on page 716 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Character A checksum is generated from the content of bytes 0 to 22 of the channel status data and transferred to byte 23 Professional mode only The checkbox enables or disables the function Remote command SOURce PROTocol CRC on page 716 Validity Defines the state of the validity bit 1 2 The validity bit is s...

Page 299: ...in hexadecimal binary or decimal If the entry brings about a bit combination that is not yet defined in the standard the parameter has no meaning that can be displayed In this event is displayed 5 8 3 Setting Bytes in Remote Control Mode When entering or querying values in remote control mode an easier method than the two individual commands for byte and value SOURce PROTocol NUMerical BYTE y SOUR...

Page 300: ...rol mode The bit combination and meaning are displayed The effect of an entry via Numerical Byte Entry is also displayed here Setting parameters A selection is offered for each parameter as defined in the standard This example is for the Sample Frequency in Consumer mode The line indicates an undefined bit combination which is possible when Numeric Byte Entry is used An attempt to set this line is...

Page 301: ...t sweep parameter is usually plotted on the x axis the recorded measured value on the y axis and the optional 2nd sweep parameter on the z axis not visible in the 2 D graph A Z sweep is therefore equivalent to a sweep with two parameters 2 dimensional sweep However the x axis can also be determined by the measured frequency X Source Frequency or the measured level X Source LevMon Up to 8 measured ...

Page 302: ...ould only be performed if both frequencies are the same Z Sweeps are possible if at least two 2 signal parameters of the configured genera tor function are sweep capable Table 5 1 List of the sweepable function parameters depending on the selected function Function VOLTAGE FREQUENCY Phase Sine yes yes Stereo Sine yes yes yes Multi sine Sine Burst yes yes Mod Dist yes total voltage yes user frequen...

Page 303: ...anels Furthermore it must also be ensured that the x axis is set to Auto in the sweep display panels used during recording of measured values On completion of the sweep measurements the used traces and the associated x axes should be switched to Hold to prevent the sweep results from being deleted if instrument settings are changed inadvertently When the sweep system is enabled START SINGLE and ST...

Page 304: ...points which means that the x axis is divided into a maximum of 1023 steps As soon as all of the points on the x axis have been processed the analyzer returns to the 1st X value and performs the next sweep cycle using the same settings The last 20 sweep cycles scans are available as the data set If more than 20 scans have been performed only the last 20 can be saved as the trace data set Similarly...

Page 305: ...ensions can each consist of max 1024 individual points which means that each axis is divided into max 1023 steps As soon as all of the points on the x axis have been processed the analyzer returns to the 1st X value and simultaneously sets the next Z value When the sweep cycle for the last Z point has been completed the X and Z values are reset to their original start values The last 20 sweep cycl...

Page 306: ...er Only possible for stereo signal Remote command SOURce SWEep ZAXis on page 720 5 9 4 Automatic Sweep With automatic sweeps the sweep stepping is performed automatically when a mea surement has been completed synchronous sweep or when a definable dwell time has expired time triggered sweep dwell sweep After START the sweep runs con tinuously without further user input for one dimensional continuo...

Page 307: ...sweep point is configured Dwell Value The sweep stepping is time controlled in constant intervals i e a new sweep point is set automatically if the preset time has expired irre spective of whether the measurements activated in the analyzer have been completed A new measurement is started at the same time The user can enter the dwell time in the next parameter field This setting ensures that sweep ...

Page 308: ...st is processed in the direction of the sweep i e starting with the last entry in the case of a downward sweep The specified dwell time will thus be maintained for each sweep point even if the sweep direction is changed Note If measured values are also required in this mode the individ ual measuring time should be determined and entered to attain a high sweep speed This applies particularly to fre...

Page 309: ...he sweep range is divided linearly by specifying a number of points linear sweep This number is entered in the Points parameter field Should be selected if equidistant linear spacing of all points is required Lin Steps The sweep range is divided into intervals of a specified linear step size starting at Start linear sweep This step size is entered in the Step parameter field Log Points The sweep r...

Page 310: ...or sweep system It is set separately for each sweep parameter The start and stop value implicitly determine the sweep direction If a stop value identical to the start value is entered the start value is automatically loa ded with the old stop value Remote command SOURce SWEep FREQuency STOP on page 719 SOURce SWEep PHASe STOP on page 719 SOURce SWEep VOLTage STOP on page 719 Points Used to enter t...

Page 311: ...e entered by which each sweep point is to be multiplied in order to move to the next sweep point The logarithmic step size of level sweeps can also be specified in dB Swapping the start and stop value reversal of the sweep direction therefore produces the reciprocal value and changes the sign of the dB value The closer the numeric value is to 1 0 or 0 dB the more sweep steps are carried out Exampl...

Page 312: ...o Auto When the sweep list is being loaded a check is made to see whether the actual basic measurement unit of the sweep file matches the sweep parameter In addition to the R S UPP list format preferably with the extension SWL files are also accepted that originate from the predecessor instruments R S UPL and R S UPD If the z axis of the two dimensional sweep is defined as a list containing more t...

Page 313: ...ted sweep the generator is set to the value specified in the following parameter field This value can be outside of the values defined by Start and Stop or outside of the first and last entries of the sweep list Mute After a completed sweep the generator level is set to 0 V or 0 FS The next sweep cycle eliminates the mute and begins again with the Start value or the first entry of the sweep list W...

Page 314: ...ettling procedures requires a number of milliseconds and should therefore be avoided for sweeps wherever possible Use of a fixed level range for level sweeps and active precorrection the level should be set to the highest value that occurs during the sweep The automatic operating mode controls the level of the analog hardware to maximize the signal to noise value of the generator at every level Th...

Page 315: ...f the sweep cycle increases more or less linearly with the number of sweep points The list sweep enables you to set the distances between the individual sweep points and thus to carry out a burst at locations of particular interest without increasing the total number drasti cally List sweep Avoiding an unnecessarily small step size Avoiding an unnecessarily large number of sweep points Minimizing ...

Page 316: ...ed many measurement functions allow reference to its settings Gen Track These functions should be used since they not only shorten the measurement time because for example the frequency does not have to be measured but can also increase the measurement accuracy e g sam ple precise setup and measurement over entire periods without errors due to mea surement termination in the case of RMS With RMS a...

Page 317: ...urement sig nals If the level of the measurement signal is known and a limitation of the dynamic range is acceptable the analyzer level range should be selected man ually It should be set to the highest anticipated level an UNDERRANGE must be expected and tolerated in this case a new measurement with corrected range set ting is not performed Range LOWEST can be selected to make sure that a higher ...

Page 318: ... HDMI analyzer can be used to measure audio and video data which are specified in accordance with the HDMI Standard 1 4a see Chapter 5 14 Configuring the HDMI Analyzer on page 325 Remote command INSTrument n1 on page 720 5 11 Configure Analog Analyzer 5 11 1 Analyzer Configuration Panel The Config panel allows you to make settings for the analog analyzers and the digital analyzer The options for c...

Page 319: ... value Do not use the instrument in measuring categories II III and IV Explanation Measuring circuits as defined in section 6 7 4 of EN61010 1 Measuring category I is intended for measurements on circuits which are not connec ted to the high voltage current system Figure 5 5 Balanced analyzer input Pin 1 is connected directly to the ground on instruments with serial numbers below 120100 140100 and...

Page 320: ... UP Z1M XLR BNC adapter Meas Channels Selecting active inputs The active measurement channels are selected by enabling the desired channels All of the channels have differential inputs Deactivated channels always have an input impedance of 200 kΩ and are always in the least sensitive range 50 V Remote command INPut 1 MCHannels n2 on page 722 AC DC Coupling Used to select the input coupling AC or D...

Page 321: ...ate of each other Split DC coupling should be selected if input voltages with very low frequency signal compo nents are to be measured AC The DC component of the sample signal is removed at the input using a highpass filter and therefore cannot affect the measurement result DC Sample signals up to 0 Hz are recorded and taken into consideration in the measurement results of RMS RMS Selective Peak D...

Page 322: ...description of the filters and their setting parameters see Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 Impedance From serial numbers 120100 140100 180100 and higher the input impedance can be switched between 200 kΩ and 600 Ω previously the impedance was permanently set at 200 kΩ The setting for input impedance can be selected for all 8 channels together Track or separately for each channel Split Rem...

Page 323: ...Auto to Lowest or from Fix to Lowest When switching over from Split to Track if the reference channel is set to Fix or Lowest If Split was selected in the operator field above the range settings can be selected separately for each activated channel above The number of newly displayed operator fields depends on the number of activated measurement channels Remote command INPut 1 RANGe CHANnels on pa...

Page 324: ...nge is activated to protect the input resistors against overload Fix The set measurement range is fixed If an input impedance of 600 Ω has been selected Fix is not avail able for protection of the input resistors against overload Note If a voltage exceeding the selected level range is applied the analyzer status is displayed with a red digit in the lower status line the digit indicates the channel...

Page 325: ...age 723 Ref Channel Reference channel for phase measurements channel specific measurements such as common mode rejection and the like Each measurement channel can be selected as a reference channel If a channel which is selected as a reference channel is not yet active switched off the channel is automatically switched on Switching off a measurement channel that was selected as the reference chann...

Page 326: ...ch triggers a measurement Depending on the Start Cond selected the measurement starts either immediately Auto or only once the required trigger condition is met For details see Chapter 5 16 Start Conditions on page 342 Remote command TRIGger SOURce on page 734 Delay Delay for Start Cond You can enter a delay for the menu item Start Cond Auto For details see Chap ter 5 16 Start Conditions on page 3...

Page 327: ...l is used to set up the analog and digital analyzer The configuration options for the digital audio analyzer are described below The digital Audio Analyzer is only available with the R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces option or R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interfaces option With digital audio interfaces there are basically two signal types i e the physical inter face signal and the encoded a...

Page 328: ...al audio analyzer in the Meas Mode Audio Data Value range 8 24 If the word width is reduced the values of the audio samples are trimmed down to the specified word width Reduced word width results in a corresponding reduction in dynamic range Remote command INPut 1 AUDiobits on page 725 Sample Freq Used to set the clock rate of the digital audio signal for the analyzer The sample frequency setting ...

Page 329: ...EQuency on page 725 Pre Filter The selected prefilter affects all measurement functions This permits desired prefilter ing without selecting appropriate filters for the individual measuring functions Remote command INPut 1 FILTer on page 773 Input Selection of the input interface for the Digital Audio Analyzer with the R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces option Unbal BNC Unbalanced digital audio i...

Page 330: ...e for all FFT supported measure ment functions e g THD THD N DFD each with Post FFT to the selected value with the goal of increasing measurement speed The limit to the FFT size is particularly useful for external sweeps for adapting the mea suring time to the time frame of an external time tick A limit is usually associated with degradation in measuring accuracy since incidents such as carrier le...

Page 331: ...smitter output Bal 7 SYNC IN I Synchronization input Bal 8 9 RX I Receiver input Bal Use of the R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interfaces option for 2 channel and analysis DIGITAL OUT BNC output for the SPDIF or AES EBU format according to EIAJ CP 340 and optical output according to TOSLINK system DIGITAL IN BNC input for the SPDIF or AES EBU format according to EIAJ CP 340 and optical output a...

Page 332: ...to the installation of the R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces or R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interfaces options applies only to the Channel command with the Multi option which is offered only for 8 chan nel I2S generation Channel Used to set the active measurement channel If a single channel measurement is selected 1 or 2 the data content of the other channel is not taken into consideration...

Page 333: ...tion for 8 channel I2S analysis is installed and if the Multi parameter field above has been selected 1 8 The corresponding analyzer channel is switched on or off Remote command INPut 1 MCHannels n2 on page 722 Word Length Word length of a data frame for each channel Value range 16 24 32 Remote command INPut n1 WLENgth on page 727 Audio Bits Word width of audio data that is analyzed If the word wi...

Page 334: ... value is automati cally updated Note The digital analyzer must re initialized for each new sampling frequency To avoid the need to repeat this time consuming proce dure too often minor deviations and fluctuations below 3 Hz are ignored 8 kHz to 192 kHz Standard sampling rates 8 kHz 192 kHz Value Variable input of sampling rate Value range for numeric input 6 75 kHz to 200 kHz Remote command INPut...

Page 335: ...yzer receives in a format similar to I2S The following format influencing parameters are additionally availa ble First Bit Fsync Slope Word Offset Remote command INPut 1 FORMat on page 726 First Bit Used to define the data bit receiving sequence MSB The most significant data bit is received first LSB The least significant data bit is received first Remote command INPut 1 FBIT on page 726 Fsync Slo...

Page 336: ...n of the filters and their setting parameters see Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 Start Cond Specifies the event which triggers a measurement After the Start Cond has been selected the measurement either begins immediately Auto or only when the desired trigger condition is fulfilled for details see Chap ter 5 16 Start Conditions on page 342 Delay Delay for Start Cond A delay time can be en...

Page 337: ...external time tick A limit is usually associated with degradation in measuring accuracy since incidents such as carrier level noise can no longer be completely recorded Remote command SENSe 1 MAX FFT SIZE on page 723 5 13 2 Timing Diagrams A number of configuration examples are shown in the timing diagrams below which illustrate the effect of some parameters Configuring the I2S Analyzer ...

Page 338: ... using the R S UPP B2 digital audio interfaces option for 2 channel analysis Connection Signal I nput O utput Description 1 GND Ground terminal 2 GND Ground terminal 3 GND Ground terminal 4 GND Ground terminal 5 GND Ground terminal 6 GND Ground terminal 7 GND Ground terminal 8 GND Ground terminal Configuring the I2S Analyzer ...

Page 339: ...yzer 16 RX_FSYNC I Frame Sync Analyzer 17 RX_DATA I Serial Data Analyzer 18 not connected 19 3 3 V 500 mA O Power Supply 20 5 V 500 mA O Power Supply 21 not connected 22 TX_DATA O Serial Data Generator 23 TX_FSYNC O Frame Sync Generator 24 TX_SCK O Serial Clock Generator 25 TX_MCLK O Master Clock Output Generator I2S plug 26 pin D Sub connector when using the R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio inte...

Page 340: ...ator 11 GND Ground terminal 12 RX_SCK I Serial Clock Analyzer 13 GND Ground terminal 14 RX FSYNC I Frame Sync Analyzer 15 RX DATA Ch 1 2 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 1 2 16 RX DATA Ch 3 4 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 3 4 17 RX DATA Ch 5 6 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 5 6 18 RX DATA Ch 7 8 I Serial Data Analyzer Ch 7 8 19 GND Ground terminal 20 GND Ground terminal 21 GND Ground terminal 22 GND Ground termin...

Page 341: ... interface option The desired clock is selected in the parameter field Sync To with Extern Masterclk or Ext Wordclk 5 14 Configuring the HDMI Analyzer 5 14 1 HDMI Analyzer Configuration Panel The Config panel enables the settings for the digital HDMI analyzer whose configura tion is described below The HDMI analyzer is available with the option R S UPP B4 HDMI and digital audio interfaces only Con...

Page 342: ...ormat Remote command SENSe 1 HDMI VIDeo COLor DEPTh on page 730 HDCP Indicates whether the A V signal of a connected HDMI source is encrypted or not On off HDCP is switched on or off Remote command SENSe 1 HDMI HDCP on page 729 CEC Handshake Used to enable disable the CEC Handshake and to initialize the communication chan nel Remote command SENSe 1 HDMI CEC HANDshake on page 729 SENSe 1 HDMI CEC I...

Page 343: ...content of the AVI Info Frame of a connected HDMI source is shown The data structure of this Info Frame is specified in the CEA 861 standard SPD Available only with the R S UPP K45 expanded audio video measurements option Opens a window in which the content of the SPD Info Frame of a connected HDMI source is shown The data structure of this Info Frame is specified in the CEA 861 standard E EDID Op...

Page 344: ...rface of the DIGITAL IN BNC jack digital audio analyzer can also be selected here This also makes it possible to use the decod ing function for encoded signals see Coding on page 329 on this interface This also makes it possible to switch this digital input with out changing instruments DigIn Optical Audio source is the Digital IN TOSLINK socket In addition to the HDMI Sink and Source ARC and HDMI...

Page 345: ...unnecessary internal signal delays and to increase measurement speed The determined decoding method is displayed in the next line The Audio Monitor is not available in Auto Detect mode Remote command SENSe 1 HDMI AUDio CODing on page 728 Detected Display field in which the determined decoding method is displayed The analysis of Dolby formats is available with the R S UPP K41 option Dolby decoding ...

Page 346: ...to the following relationship Remote command SENSe 1 HDMI AUDio CTS on page 728 Channel Selection of the channels to be analyzed If a 2 channel audio format PCM 2Ch Lay 0 is supplied the following selection box is provided For an 8 channel audio format PCM 8Ch Lay 1 this selection box disap pears and 8 Meas Channel checkboxes are provided The analyzer is in Channel Multi mode internally 1 Only sig...

Page 347: ...rate of incoming audio data is automatically determined and used for the analysis Auto The sampling rate present is automatically determined and set Note The HDMI analyzer must be reinitialized with every new sam pling frequency To avoid the need to repeat this time consuming pro cedure too often minor deviations and fluctuations below 3 Hz are ignored 32 192 kHz Standard sampling rates 32 kHz to ...

Page 348: ...s displayed This data structure consists of the channel status bytes 0 to 4 of a consumer format according to IEC 60958 Refer also to Chapter 5 31 Proto col Analysis on page 440 If the box is checked the protocol analysis is carried out but measurement speed is reduced The window is updated provided it has been opened via the Show button If high measurement speed is important uncheck the box Remot...

Page 349: ...ame as the reference channel Chap ter 5 16 Start Conditions on page 342 Remote command TRIGger CHANnel on page 734 Start Cond Specifies the event which triggers a measurement Depending on the Start Cond selected the measurement either begins immediately Auto or only when the desired trigger condition is fulfilled for details see Chap ter 5 16 Start Conditions on page 342 Remote command TRIGger SOU...

Page 350: ...nal sweeps for adapting the mea suring time to the time frame of an external time tick A limit is usually associated with degradation in measuring accuracy since incidents such as carrier level noise can no longer be completely recorded Remote command SENSe 1 MAX FFT SIZE on page 723 Hotplug detect Toggles the Hotplug Detect Signal and thus causes a reset of the HDMI interface of a connected sourc...

Page 351: ...MI 1 0 1 3c HEC Data Optional HDMI 1 4 with Ethernet 5 TMDS Data1 Shield 15 SCL I C Serial Clock for DDC 6 TMDS Data1 16 SDA I C Serial Data Line for DDC 7 TMDS Data0 17 DDC CEC HEC Ground 8 TMDS Data0 Shield 18 5 V Power max 50 mA 9 TMDS Data0 19 Hot Plug Detect all versions HEC Data Optional HDMI 1 4 with Ether net 10 TMDS Clock 5 14 4 Interface Assignment of HEC All Ethernet sockets follow the ...

Page 352: ...g The settings for Sink ARC are performed in the Config panel for the Digital Audio generator instrument see Sink ARC on page 209 As signal source for the Audio Return Channel the supplied audio signal can be directly looped through Alternatively the internally generated signal of the digital audio generator can be selected To test the Ethernet functionality of a device under test the HEC Sink RJ ...

Page 353: ...erred to as a single measurement see Chapter 5 15 3 2 Single measurement on page 340 and continuous recording as continuous measurement see Chapter 5 15 3 1 Continuous measurement on page 339 The measurement system is controlled explicitly via the keys and buttons described in the introduction implicitly by means of break events These are events user entries which invalid ate the measurement curre...

Page 354: ...ired in order to reduce the total measurement time Unnecessary measurement times are avoided by deactivating unused channels Deactivating individual measurement types in the Analyzer Function panel stops measurement results which are not required from being recorded and displayed All activated measurement types are measured in each single measurement The measurement is not regarded as having been ...

Page 355: ...d measure ment types continuously until one of the following events occurs START START terminates the current measurement immediately resets the MIN MAX indi cator the MIN MAX values the limit violations of the measurement displays and cau ses continuous measurement to be restarted Furthermore starting or restarting a measurement also causes certain generator func tions to restart The sine burst b...

Page 356: ...th remote control a NAN not a number 9 97e37 value will be returned Each single measurement must be triggered again by pressing SINGLE or by a break event During single measurements the control keys or buttons have the following functions START START terminates the current measurement immediately resets the MIN MAX indi cator the MIN MAX values the limit violations of the measurement displays and ...

Page 357: ...ement displays and causes continuous measurement to be started Furthermore starting or restarting a measurement also causes certain generator func tions to restart The sine burst burst signal is reset that is it starts with the burst phase or burst on delay The Play function starts again at the first sample in the WAV file The Arbitrary function also starts again at the beginning Remote command IN...

Page 358: ...rom this panel Time controlled measured value recording Externally controlled measured value recording i e controlled by altering the mea surement signal known for short as external sweeps Level controlled measured value triggering When the conditions for measured value recording are met the measured value is trig gered displayed in the measurement results panel and if appropriate stored in a mea ...

Page 359: ...l on page 723 Trigger Chan Indicates the trigger channel only appears on multichannel analyzers The Trigger Chan determines on which channel the trigger condition is tested The following are affected The Start Condition The trigger source of the waveform monitors If a channel that is not yet active is selected as the trigger channel this channel is switched on automatically If the measurement chan...

Page 360: ...e Tick can be selected Note With the multichannel analyzers the trigger conditions appear in the parameter list without an explicit channel specification Note If the reference points of a sweep are modified under the influence of the start condition during the sweep e g due to over long measurement times during a time tick sweep some sweep points may be outside of the visible x axis of the sweep g...

Page 361: ...the time tick has expired If neither the frequency sweep of the selective RMS measurement nor any generator sweep is active the time tick defines the sweep x axis During the time tick sweep the time stamps on the x axis are updated and corrected if necessary e g if a measurement lasts longer than the set time tick and the individual measured values are entered according to their correct times When...

Page 362: ...rement function intermediate results are displayed Otherwise end results are displayed This start condition cannot be combined with a frequency sweep of the selective RMS measurement or a generator sweep The time stamps of the measured value acquisition define the sweep x axis When START is pressed and immediately after the time chart sweep is switched on a series of periodic measured value record...

Page 363: ...tart or stop value Volt Externally controlled measured value recording measured value trig gering when a significant level change occurs on the trigger channel external level sweep can be selected on multichannel analyzers only if the trigger channel is switched on The measurement results are entered in the measured value buffer and displayed in the measurement results panel The measured level is ...

Page 364: ...n enter a delay for the Start Cond Auto menu item It applies under the following conditions Signal change on the generator value entry value change via rotary knob Signal change on the generator by entering a value Performance of sweeps Stop Cont or Start Continuous Measurement Single Single Measurement Change in the Analyzer panels Change in the Generator panels Change in the Filter panel The Del...

Page 365: ...easurement During this waiting time no measurement is performed If the time tick is shorter than the measurement time any time ticks occurring during a running measurement will be ignored This means that measurements will be started at time intervals corresponding to an integer multiple 1 of the selected time tick When the start condition is Time Chart not available in the multichannel analyzers t...

Page 366: ... does not start until a trigger event occurs The generator should be stepped in a time controlled manner dwell sweep setting in generator Next step dwell value or dwell file in order to achieve independence from generator sweep stepping and measurement For analyzer synchronous stepping setting in generator Next Step Anlr Sync it is important to ensure that each sweep step extends beyond the variat...

Page 367: ...e case of edge sensitive triggering the triggering edge is defined by the start and stop values If the start value is less than the stop value triggering occurs on a positive edge that is at the exact moment when a value below Start is followed by a value above Start Min Volt This is used to enter a minimum level for external frequency sweeps If the signal is below this threshold no triggering occ...

Page 368: ...e end value Note Multiscan mode It must be ensured that the termination condition is met to ensure that all scans are stored Remote command ARM FREQuency STOP on page 735 ARM VOLTage STOP on page 736 Variation For entering the relative change of frequency or level in the form of a percentage with effect from which a new measurement is triggered in the case of external sweeps For external level swe...

Page 369: ...The Arbitrary function also starts again at the beginning 5 20 1 Overview of Sweep Options The following information refers to an activated sweep system i e a sweep is activa ted in either the generator or the analyzer Sweeps are measurement cycles in which the individual measurements are triggered by predefined generator and analyzer settings The generator and analyzer sweeps can be defined eithe...

Page 370: ...ctivated or deactivated directly on the associated function panel A generator sweep under Sweep Ctrl in the Generator Function panel Sweep of the tracking filter for the RMS Selective measurement function under Sweep Ctrl in the Analyzer Function panel Only one of the two sweep systems can be active at any one time If the user activates a sweep while another sweep is already active the sweep that ...

Page 371: ...interrupts the currently running sweep at once deletes the sweep curves in multiscan mode all scans are deleted including the min max curves resets the Min Max data and the limit violations of the sweep curves causes the continuous sweep to restart Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 731 ON INITiate FORCe on page 732 STARt SINGLE Pressing SINGLE switches to single sweep The remaining points...

Page 372: ...ated by Sweep Single A current single sweep is interrupted or terminated by the following events START Pressing START interrupts the currently running sweep at once deletes the sweep curves in multiscan mode all scans are deleted including the min max curves resets the Min Max data and the limit violations of the sweep curves starts a continuous sweep Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 731...

Page 373: ...tation when the system is in this state The sweep state is indicated by Sweep Waiting A terminated single sweep is affected by the following events START Pressing START deletes the sweep curves in multiscan mode all scans are deleted including the min max curves resets the Min Max data and the limit violations of the sweep curves starts a continuous sweep Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page...

Page 374: ... limit violations of the sweep curves starts a continuous sweep Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 731 ON INITiate FORCe on page 732 STARt SINGLE Pressing SINGLE causes the single sweep to be restarted Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 731 OFF INITiate FORCe on page 732 SINGle STOP CONT Pressing STOP CONT continues the sweep Remote command Termination event starts the continuous m...

Page 375: ...es the DC component of any signal Peak determines the peak value of any given signal the measured value changes with the peak value without a delay The voltage of an analog signal is determined in volts and the amplitude of a digital sig nal is determined in FS According to AES 17 a full scale digital sine wave signal has a peak value and an RMS of 1 0 FS i e in contrast to the analog signal the R...

Page 376: ...ion on page 757 Filter Activating a digital filter in the test channel Depending on the level measurement method selected up to 2 user defined filters or weighting filters can be looped into the measurement path RMS Peak FFT max 2 filters RMS Selective max 1 filter in addition to selection filter DC no filter The user definable filters are configured as filters 01 to 09 in the filter panel see Cha...

Page 377: ...f RMS measurement broadband Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion RMS Meas Time This is used for choosing the measurement time for the purpose of adapting the mea surement speed to the waveform or in the case of single tone signals to the signal fre quency The priority can be set to a short measurement time or high accuracy depending on specific measurement requirements In automatic measurement modes th...

Page 378: ...not exceed 0 05 With very weak low frequency or pure DC signals the maximum measurement time is limited to 200 ms corresponding to 2 periods at 10 Hz Recommended for single tone measurements using an unknown external signal source if maximum measurement accuracy is desired Note For infrasound measurements below 10 Hz can only be mea sured using a fixed measurement time Value or Gen Track Value The...

Page 379: ...channel 1 tracks generator channel 1 and measurement channel 2 tracks generator channel 2 in two channel analyzer instruments In the case of multichannel analyzers measurement channel 1 tracks generator channel 1 and measurement channels 2 8 track genera tor channel 2 Note If Arbitrary is used as the generator signal the measurement time is synchronized to the number of samples in the loaded file ...

Page 380: ...rement time is adapted to the measured signal frequency provided an AC signal that is sufficiently strong and not too low in fre quency is present f 10 Hz Note With severely noise corrupted or distorted signals and multi tone signals the automatic measurement modes especially Auto Fast may no longer be able to clearly detect the signal period To prevent measurement errors such signals should there...

Page 381: ... infrasound measurements below 10 Hz can only be mea sured using a fixed measurement time Value or Gen Track Value The RMS measurement is performed over a preset time which must be entered in the parameter field below To prevent errors due to termination of measurements the selected measurement time should be an integer multiple of the period If the frequency of the signal to be measured is unknow...

Page 382: ...lly dominant Lower Fre quency Note If Stereo Sine is used as the generator signal measurement channel 1 tracks generator channel 1 and measurement channel 2 tracks generator channel 2 in two channel analyzer instruments In the case of multichannel analyzers measurement channel 1 tracks generator channel 1 and measurement channels 2 8 track genera tor channel 2 Note If Arbitrary is used as the gene...

Page 383: ...l around the center frequency Bandpass filter Bandstop filter The relative bandwidth of one twelfth octave is 6 It is calculated from 77 5 0577 0 2 1 2 24 24 BP 1 3 Oct BS 1 3 Oct Bandpass filter bandstop filter with the relative width of one third octave geometrically symmetrical around the center frequency Bandpass filter Bandstop filter The relative bandwidth of one third octave is 23 It is cal...

Page 384: ... measurements the bandwidth can be reduced down to a sampling rate 48000 but at least 1 Hz As very long filter settling times occur in the range below 10 Hz measurement results can only be viewed after several seconds Remote command SENSe 1 BANDwidth MODE on page 755 SENSe 1 BANDwidth on page 755 Sweep Ctrl Used to activate and configure or deactivate the bandpass sweep bandstop sweep in the analy...

Page 385: ...emote command SENSe 1 SWEep CONTrol on page 755 Spacing Used to select the sweep range spacing i e the way in which the sweep points are distributed on the sweep axis Only visible for activated bandpass bandstop sweep Lin Points The sweep range is divided linearly by specifying a number of points linear sweep This number is entered in the Points parameter field Should be selected if equidistant li...

Page 386: ...nd stop value implicitly determine the sweep direction If a stop value identical to the start value is entered the start value is automatically loa ded with the old stop value Remote command SENSe 1 SWEep STOP on page 756 Points Used to enter the number of sweep points for the bandpass bandstop center fre quency Only visible for activated bandpass bandstop sweep if Lin Points or Log Points is set ...

Page 387: ...s to 1 0 the more sweep steps will be performed Example for log upward sweep Note Since the last step of the sweep is automatically adapted such that it corre sponds exactly to the stop value it may deviate by max 50 from the selected step size If this is to be avoided either the start stop value must be corrected accordingly or the sweep spacing must be set using the Points parameter Remote comma...

Page 388: ...tion is selected in the generator e g a multi tone signal or noise signal Recommended for use with the internal R S UPP Universal Gener ator Freq Ch1 The bandpass bandstop center frequency tracks the frequency mea sured in channel 1 not selectable in the multichannel analyzers Recommended for use with an external signal source Freq Ch2 The bandpass bandstop center frequency tracks the frequency me...

Page 389: ...21 4 Peak Measurement Measurement of the peak value of any given signal and the rise and fall of the mea sured value all occur without a delay The measured value contains both AC and DC components If a square wave is applied it is limited with respect to bandwidth by the upper mea surement limit of the selected analyzer and overshoots occur at the edges Gibbs phe nomenon The overshoots are also me...

Page 390: ...owest level is measured peak to peak voltage Abs Peak The numerically highest positive or negative voltage value is mea sured Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion MMODe on page 753 Intv Time Used to select the measurement interval within which the peak search is to be per formed When the interval time has expired the peak value memory is reset and the next peak value is sought Fix 50 ms Measurement int...

Page 391: ...tor is shown and the previously configured measurement function is maintained Function DC Selection of DC voltage measurement Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion DC 5 22 Signal to Noise Measurements The R S UPP provides signal to noise measurements S N measurements according to a number of different weighting methods Each of these measurement functions measures the level with and without a signal For ...

Page 392: ... results in a longer measurement time The level weighting method can be chosen from the following RMS Root mean square broadband measurement Peak Peak value measurement When the analog analyzer is used switching off the generator causes a DC jump at the analyzer input and this must not be allowed to affect the highly sensitive noise measurement There are two measures which will solve this problem ...

Page 393: ...f broadband RMS measurements Pos Peak Both level measurements are carried out in the form of peak value measurements of the highest positive level Neg Peak Both the level measurements are carried out in the form of peak value measurements of the highest negative level Pk to Pk Both level measurements are carried out in the form of peak to peak measurements Abs Peak Both the level measurements are ...

Page 394: ...least one of the 2 filters in the analog ana lyzer should be a highpass or comparable weighting filter in order to filter out the DC jump when the generator is turned off For this purpose HighPass 22 Hz is activated in Filter 1 by default The user definable filters are configured as filters 01 to 09 in the filter panel see Chap ter 5 40 User Definable Filters on page 469 and can then be used repea...

Page 395: ...ect the signal period For the avoidance of measurement errors such signals should therefore preferably be measured using Gen Track or Value Auto Fast For use with the RMS measurement mode only Level measurements are performed as far as possible over whole AC periods In the case of high frequencies the measurement time is extended so that a maximum algorithmic error of 1 is not excee ded In the cas...

Page 396: ...lt measurement is always performed over a complete period of the repeatedly output ARB signal Value Measurement is performed inside a predefined time which has to be entered in the following parameter field In order to avoid errors caused by the termination of measurements the chosen measurement time should be an integer multiple of the period and due to the noise measurement should not be too sho...

Page 397: ...tion of the first 8 harmonics The noise between the harmonics is not measured An ultra pure sine wave signal is required as the mea surement signal THD N SINAD total harmonic distortion noise is a distortion measurement that measures the energy of the broadband noise and optionally of all harmonics within a selectable frequency band An ultra pure sine wave signal is required as the measurement sig...

Page 398: ...e minimum FFT value you can increase the ratio of measurement accuracy to measurement speed loading since the distortion components are then measured in a narrower band If the selected FFT value is not large enough to capture the measurement signal increase the FFT gradually by a factor of 2 The maximum FFT value depends on the bandwidth or sampling rate at a 22 kHz bandwidth analog the FFT value ...

Page 399: ...the auricle Note The precorrector table is created after acquiring or reading in the trace data from the DUT in the DispConfig panels deactivated The precorrector is disabled The FFT bins are used and displayed without change The measured value is calculated from the original FFT spectrum activated The precorrector is enabled The next entry field which is Equal File for the file name of the precor...

Page 400: ...harmonics can be displayed either as an RMS or as a ratio to the total RMS Unlike with THD N SINAD measurement the noise between the harmon ics is not measured An ultra pure sine wave signal is required as the measurement signal The selected frequency of this sine wave signal should be such that the significant components of the distortion spectrum are still below the upper measurement limit If th...

Page 401: ...lect the harmonics to be taken into consideration in the THD measured value and to select the calculation formula for the measured value Note All 8 harmonics and the fundamental are always displayed in the graph irre spective of the selected measurement mode The term Level indicates that the measurement result is displayed as an RMS value and is not relative to the total RMS value as is customary ...

Page 402: ...lue TotalRMS U U U U dB U d d d d THD 2 9 2 7 2 5 2 3 log 20 The measured value can be displayed in as well as in dB All di The distortion of all harmonics d2 to d9 root from the square sum of all 8 harmonics is measured relative to the total RMS TotalRMS U U U U dB U d d d d THD 2 9 2 8 2 3 2 2 log 20 The measured value can be displayed in as well as in dB dmin to dmax The distortion of all harmo...

Page 403: ... d d d d THD U U U U V U The measured value is displayed in voltage units volts or FS Level dmin to dmax The distortion voltage of all harmonics in the range of dmin to dmax is measured In the bargraph display harmonics are only shown up to d9 max 2 min 2 d d THD U U V U The measured value is displayed in voltage units volts or FS Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion MMODe on page 753 Even Harmonics Od...

Page 404: ...eased An error message is output if an unsuitable signal function is selected in the generator e g a multi tone signal or noise signal Recommended when using the internal universal generator Remote command SENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental MODE on page 760 SENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental on page 759 Refinement Improvement of the signal to noise ratio 1 The refinement factor 1 is suitable for the THD measure...

Page 405: ...hat the measured value only contains non harmonic components and noise An FFT is used to record the spectrum filter out the fundamental and calculate the total remaining energy residual spectrum comprising of harmonics and broadband noise within the band limits specified with Frq Lim Low and Frq Lim Upp The FFT value is automatically adapted to the measured fundamental frequency the lower the freq...

Page 406: ... rates higher than 50 kHz digital or at a 80 kHz bandwidth analog the FFT value is increased to a maximum of 256 k The maximum integration time in the two channel analog analyzer fast mode is there fore around 1 4 s Sideband suppression is designed for the shortest possible measurement time For very low frequency signals less than 12 Hz sideband suppression can be improved at the cost of a longer ...

Page 407: ...lue and is not relative to the total RMS value as is customary with distortion measure ments With the Noise measurements it is also possible to filter all harmonics except the fun damental out of the overall signal Note The noise energy of the respective sideband is also filtered out with each har monic so that with very low frequencies with theoretically with large numbers of har monics a large p...

Page 408: ...be displayed in as well as in dB Level THD N The total distortion voltage consisting of broadband noise and the harmonic is measured 2 2 3 2 2 Noise d d N THD U U U V U The measured value is displayed in voltage units volts or FS Level Noise The noise voltage broadband noise without the harmonics is mea sured The measured value is displayed in voltage units volts or FS Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCt...

Page 409: ...rnally calculated initial FFT value is entered in the Min FFT Size parameter field It can then be freely changed by the user 1 kHz max The suppression bandwidth is a maximum of 1 kHz i e 500 Hz both below and above the fundamental The initial FFT value is very small e g 1 k at an analog bandwidth of 22 kHz and a sampling rate of 48 kHz and the measurement time is very short especially at higher fr...

Page 410: ...ls with a high noise component is thus improved and measurement speed is increased An error message is output if an unsuitable signal function is selected in the generator e g a multi tone signal or noise signal Recommended when using the internal universal generator Remote command SENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental MODE on page 760 SENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental on page 759 Filter Two digital filters user ...

Page 411: ...narios 1 and 5 were pos sible with these instruments Note The upper band limit can be limited in the analog analyzer using the Bandwidth parameter field which has the same effect as an additional lowpass filter Remote command SENSe 1 FILTer n2 on page 773 For a description of the filters and their setting parameters see Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 Frq Lim Low Used to enter the lower ba...

Page 412: ...roducts selectively measurements are therefore largely unaffected by noise and calculates their square sum Contrary to the recom mendation in IEC 60268 the total intermodulation factor is therefore measured to ensure that this measurement method is comparable to the customary SMPTE mea surement method The measurement algorithm is highly tolerant with respect to the level ratio of the inter fering ...

Page 413: ...d d dB MODDIST Equation 5 3 Total intermodulation factor in dB For alternative intermodulation measurement see Chapter 5 23 5 DFD on page 398 For more distortion measurements see Chapter 5 23 Distortion Measurements on page 381 Figure 5 10 Mod Dist measurement with 7 kHz useful signal and quadrupled interferer at 60 Hz Function MOD DIST Selection of MOD DIST measurement Remote command SENSe 1 FUNC...

Page 414: ... 20 kHz and the frequency difference should preferably be 80 Hz The DFD signal function of the internal universal generator is recommended as the signal source This allows the center frequency and difference frequency for IEC 60268 and the upper frequency and difference frequency for IEC 60118 to be varied Furthermore it is also possible to sweep the center frequency and upper frequency For altern...

Page 415: ...than the results according to IEC 60118 d2 IEC 268 Measurement of the 2nd order intermodulation product relative to the double amplitude at the upper frequency acc to IEC 60268 2 1 2 2 2 lg 20 f f f U U dB d d3 IEC 268 Measurement of the 3rd order intermodulation products referenced to the double amplitude at the upper frequency acc to IEC 60268 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 lg 20 f f f f f U U U dB d Figure ...

Page 416: ...order intermodulation product refer enced to the single amplitude at the upper frequency acc to IEC 60118 2 2 1 2 3 lg 20 f f f U U dB d Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion MMODe on page 753 5 24 Polarity Measurement Polarity measurement is used to test whether a DUT such as a cable forwards an applied signal with the identical or reversed polarity To determine the polarity a peak measurement is perfo...

Page 417: ...cle can be applied Function Polarity Switching the measurement function to polarity measurement The measurement result for the function is displayed as 1 0 Pol for a non reversed signal and 1 0 Pol for a reversed signal No further settings are needed Note When using polarity signals that are not DC free measurements in the analog analyzer should preferably be performed using DC coupling in order t...

Page 418: ...71 Third octave analysis 23 16 Sixth octave analysis 11 56 Twelfth octave analysis 5 78 Twenty fourth octave analysis 2 89 The reference frequency is 1 kHz All other band center frequencies are computed by reference to this frequency by multiplying or dividing by Selecting the frequency bands to be measured involves specifying the upper and lower limit frequencies A separate RMS value is determine...

Page 419: ...ue of the signal is displayed in the range Frq Lim Low to Frq Lim Upp as the measurement result for the function Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion NOCTave Meas Mode This defines the measurement mode and thus implicitly the center frequencies and rel ative bandwidth of the bandpass filters The center frequencies of the subbands are spaced at intervals of 21 n from the 1 kHz reference frequency The ex...

Page 420: ...ations in the measured values In turn the required FFT size is dependent on the sampling rate or the analog band width and the width of the narrowest subband that is on the measurement mode and the lower band limit Auto This sets the minimum possible measurement time This setting is recommended for the purpose of measuring independ ently of the lower band limit and measurement mode and always usin...

Page 421: ...ay the frequency response of a transmission link can be precorrected for example and in so doing the measurement point is transformed into another reference point When precorrection is enabled the computed FFT bins are multiplied by a frequency dependent factor after which they are used to calculate the nth octave bands and applied to the display The factor is determined by interpolation between t...

Page 422: ...requency entered does not alter the energy content of the lower band The lower the frequency of the lower limit frequency the narrower the frequency bands which have to be measured In order to not to drop below a minimum number of bins per band the FFT resolution and the FFT size must be increased in the narrower fre quency bands The lower limit frequency therefore has a decisive influence on the ...

Page 423: ...s reserved for the FFT Graph1 Config and or FFT Graph2 Config windows The actual display takes place in the FFT Graph1 or FFT Graph2 windows deactivated Post FFT deactivated The necessary Post FFT size is computed automatic from the sam pling rate and the width of the narrowest subband defined by the lower limit frequency and the measurement mode The received samples are weighted using the Hann wi...

Page 424: ...idistant fre quency lines bins which indicate the magnitude or the phase of the respective fre quency components The graphical display of the magnitude or phase bins is referred to as a spectrum or spectral display According to system theory the FFT analysis assumes that the signal is periodic i e it continues continuously beyond the observed time period Since this ideal state only exists in a few...

Page 425: ... be required to produce the same frequency resolution Other variables which appear as display fields in the group of FFT parameter fields are derived from the FFT size see Resolution and Meas Time In the analog analyzer the internal sampling rate is determined by the selected band width FFT Size Size of the Function FFT can be set in powers of 2 from 512 0 5 k to 256 k Not only the integration tim...

Page 426: ...age suppression in the far off range Selecting the rectangular window deactivates windowing Window Selection of the window function With the Post FFT of the distortion and level measurements the window cannot be selected by the user but instead is preset by the respective measurement function and displayed here Hann This window combines selectivity with good leakage suppression in the far off rang...

Page 427: ... the Post FFT displays the frequency spectrum recorded for calculating the measured values It can be activated for the measurement functions THD N SINAD THD DFD and Mod Dist ChirpBased Meas and RMS measure ments Measurement is performed in the same level as the associated measurement function i e downstream of all filters The respective measurement function adjusts the FFT size and window to its s...

Page 428: ...vated The internally used FFT can be displayed in the FFT graph deactivated Post FFT deactivated Recommended for increasing the measurement speed e g for sweeps or remote control activated Post FFT activated the associated measurement function defines the remaining settings dynamically Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT STATe on page 758 5 26 4 FFT Measurement Function The FFT can be selected as ...

Page 429: ...ecision is set as Meas Time for the frequency measure ment With AC coupling analog or DC Suppress digital the DC component bell shaped curve is not included in the measurement If a Window function is used it is 5 bins wide so that the bottom 6 bins are not included in the RMS result Note To include very low frequency signals in the RMS value either the FFT size must be selected sufficiently large ...

Page 430: ...evel and subtracted from the input samples This parameter field is not available in the analog analyzer because the suppression function is already provided by the AC coupling which can be set up using the hard ware deactivated DC suppression deactivated The DC component of the sample signal is not suppressed DC cou pling and is included in the measurement result and the graphical display Recommen...

Page 431: ...r file can simply be generated from the frequency response requiring equalization and need not be in the form of a coefficient file or pole zero file Application In acoustic measurements e g with mobile telephones on artificial ears of type 3 2 or higher it is possible to compensate for the transfer function ERP ear reference point to DRP drum reference point Measurement of the sound waves by the ...

Page 432: ...ime Fast or the bandwidth limitation must be disabled When the AC coupling is enabled or DC Suppress in the digital range the RMS calculation starts above the DC bell curve When the Window function is disabled i e Window Rectangular only the DC bin otherwise the first 6 bins are suppressed Thus with DC suppression the actual lower frequency limit depends on the Window function which means that the...

Page 433: ...ize of the overlap in percent is indicated Overlap Factor The overlap mode is especially useful when short glitches are to be detected Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT MODE on page 762 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT OVLFactor on page 762 Avg Mode Used to activate the averaging function and select the averaging method When averaging is activated an additional parameter field appears in which the aver age ...

Page 434: ...s how many consecutive FFTs are used for averaging With exponential averaging the number k entered here determines the extent to which the previous measurements are taken into consideration in the result The weighting of the previous measurements is k 1 k If for example k 20 is entered as the average count the current analysis result is weighted by 5 and the previous measurements by 95 Remote comm...

Page 435: ... is the Span value less one bin Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT STOP on page 763 Resolution Displays the frequency resolution The frequency resolution is the quotient of sampling rate and FFT size Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT RESolution on page 763 Meas Time Displays the integration time The integration time is the quotient of FFT size and sampling rate Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion F...

Page 436: ...and is activated with the appropriate setting for Reference in the FFT Graph Config Panel see setting Noise Density Noise Density dB for parameter Reference on page 523 Noise Density Indication of V sqrt Hz on a logarithmic or linear y axis Noise Density dB Indication of dBV sqrt Hz on a linear y axis Noise Voltage Density ...

Page 437: ...e generator and analyzer Refer to This menu item determines the signal to which the delay is referenced If this signal is missing or its level is too low the measurement cannot be carried out Trigger IN BNC The reference time is when there is a positive TTL level at the rear BNC socket which is labeled with TRIGGER IN The delay time of all switched on audio channels is referenced to this time Ref ...

Page 438: ... percentage trigger threshold relative to the nominal RMS value of the range selected for this channel For a threshold of 10 therefore the analog signal in the range 200 mV RMS would trigger at a peak value less than 28 28 mV The delay time of a channel is triggered that is determined up to the time when the audio signal first exceeds the high threshold or first undershoots the low threshold Remot...

Page 439: ...asurement together with evaluation of the harmon ics for each frequency sample It is not possible to specify the precise time saving because the chirp parameters have to be adjusted as precisely as possible to the fre quency range and the settling characteristics of the DUT in order to achieve the short est possible measurement times Owing to its short measurement time chirp based measurement is o...

Page 440: ... FUNCtion DELay MODE on page 766 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DELay VALue on page 766 Max Delay Maximum expected settling time of the DUT The measurement time is extended by this time Max Delay ensures that the complete chirp signal is recorded and calcula ted This value can be longer than the actual delay The trailing silence does not dis turb the result Remote command SENSe 1 VOLTage APERture on page 754 Re...

Page 441: ...ellow used in this sweep subsystem to represent the desired measurement result Example If Phase Response is selected in the combo box with the title Fct Swp3TrB the phase response is represented by trace B yellow curve in the Sweep Graph3 window The graphic is configured accordingly in the DispConfig panel Sweep Graph3 Config All level values are calculated as RMS values Figure 5 13 Assignment of ...

Page 442: ...765 SENSe 1 CHIRpbased MMODe SWEep n4 B on page 765 Even Harmonics Odd Harmonics Selection of the desired harmonics This panel only appears if the chirp based mea surement function Level THD or THD is selected The RMS value of the selected harmonics is measured The chirp based measurement function Level THD or THD above it determines whether the RMS value is dis played directly or in relation to t...

Page 443: ...er Remote command SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit UPPer on page 760 5 29 2 Data Buffers On completion of the measurement the traces of the selected chirp based measure ment functions are shown in the sweep graphics At the same time this data is availa ble in the internal data buffers in the same display units that were selected in the corre sponding sweep subsystem The raw data for Freq Response Phase Res...

Page 444: ...ins the trace data for Level THD is addressed with the suffix 6 as shown in the table below The values are available in the basic unit V or FS Example for reading in raw data based on example above The raw data is addressed with the suffix 10 to 89 In this example it is assumed that measurement was performed on the channel Ch2 The suffix for the raw data of the harmonics is calculated from the cha...

Page 445: ... the selected unit TRACe SWEep i LOAD COUNt AY BY is used to determine the number of available values Correspondence to the SCPI commands is shown again in SYSTem MEMory DATA n3 on page 826 3 Fct Swp1 TrB 4 Fct Swp2 TrA 5 Fct Swp2 TrB 6 Fct Swp3 TrA 7 Fct Swp3 TrB 8 Fct Swp4 TrA 9 Fct Swp4 TrB 10 Ch1 freq response Raw data of the Freq Response function measured on channel 1 Level values RMS over f...

Page 446: ...n page 826 5 30 Analysis in the Time Domain Besides analysis in the frequency domain the R S UPP can also be used to analyze input signals in the time domain Time and frequency domain analyses can be per formed simultaneously and irrespective of the selected measurement function 5 30 1 Waveform Monitor The waveform monitor is used for signal analysis in the time domain Both channels of the active ...

Page 447: ...ed for increasing the measurement speed e g for sweeps or remote control activated Waveform monitor activated the parameter fields shown above appear Remote command SENSe7 FUNCtion ON OFF Meas Mode Used to select the operating mode Standard Uncompressed recording of all samples A maximum of 480000 sam ples can be stored The possible recording length depends only on the bandwidth analog or sampling...

Page 448: ...oportion to the factor n Recommended for recording low frequency signals if the standard recording time is too short and the signal trace over time is of inter est Note Delay Ch1 or Delay Ref Chan only for the FFT measure ment function cannot be used in this mode and is thus set to 0 s Remote command SENSe7 MMODe on page 767 Comp Factor Used for entering the compression factor in compressed record...

Page 449: ...ong recording time is set any section of the recorded samples can be analyzed by reducing the graphical time axis also possible at a later stage Note The selected Trace Length not the length of the displayed trace section deter mines the recording time for each measurement and thus also the total measurement time If a high measurement speed is required e g for sweeps or remote control mode the mem...

Page 450: ...rement channel selected as Trigger Chan triggers the recording Only available in the multichannel analyzers if the trigger channel is not deactivated Note If the trigger channel is deactivated the Trigger Source is not operable Manual Recording is triggered as soon as the measurement starts Gen Burst Recording is synchronized to the start of the generator signal pref erably Sine Burst The generato...

Page 451: ...er threshold for the first time Re arming takes place as soon as a level below the trigger thresh old occurs Falling Triggering takes place when the level on the measurement channel selected as Trigger Source drops below the trigger threshold for the first time Re arming takes place as soon as a level above the trigger thresh old occurs Remote command SENSe7 TRIGger SLOPe on page 767 Pretrigger Us...

Page 452: ...g duration for the triggered section of the signal is reduced Remote command SENSe7 TRIGger PRE on page 767 Autotrigger For activating the autotrigger that is forced triggering when the trigger condition is not fulfilled true within the time selected as Trace Length deactivated Autotrigger off The triggering of waveform recording and thus the termination of a single measurement that has been start...

Page 453: ...erating mode it should only be used for measuring delays and not for measuring signal quality The delay of the DUT can be read directly from the waveform display by comparison with the start of the generator signal A sine burst signal is particularly suitable for this type of measurement since it has a zero level before and after the burst if the Low Level value burst duration and burst interval p...

Page 454: ...for 48 kHz sampling rate 40 kHz bandwidth for 96 kHz sampling rate 80 kHz bandwidth for 192 kHz sampling rate For evaluation of the measurement the waveform window must be visible and a vertical graphic cursor or two cursors for two channel measurements must be enabled Movement Next Sample With a two channel measurement this allows the relative delay of the two measurement signals to be read in ad...

Page 455: ...he following settings depend on the length of the expected delay and apply to the generator function Sine Burst The recording length Trace Length should be around 110 of the maximum expected delay but at least 10 ms Reducing the recording time increases the update rate with continuous measurements and the time resolution of the graphical display The frequency of the burst signal should be selected...

Page 456: ...anel The channel status information and error flags are displayed in a separate window known as the Dig Ana lyzer Protocol window This window can be opened via the Menu bar Displays Dig Analyzer Protocol from within the Analyzer Config panel or from within the Analyzer Function panel The setting parameters for the protocol analysis appear at the end of the Analyzer Function panel Prot Analysis Str...

Page 457: ...l basis This information is therefore available only after 2 192 samples at the earliest A single measure ment must therefore capture at least 384 samples which can lengthen the measurement time during fast measurements Protocol analysis in the HDMI analyzer instrument Since the stream header has no channel reference for HDMI the channels are always represented as identical in the protocol analyze...

Page 458: ...el status information is not highlighted From Output Changes compared to the channel status information generated by the R S UPP generator are highlighted This setting is only worthwhile when the internal generator is used and channel status information is being generated Between Channels Differences between the two channels are highlighted The differen ces are displayed on both channels For the H...

Page 459: ...on from the individual bit fields in a readable form for both channels in the Dig Analyzer Protocol window Digital Audio instrument Channel information is always decoded and displayed for both channels regardless of whether only one or both audio channels are being mea sured HDMI instrument The decoding and display of the channel information is always done for one channel There are two different f...

Page 460: ... can be found in IEC stan dard 60958 3 Consumer Applications or IEC 60958 4 Professional Applications or the Protocol Generator panel 5 31 3 Error Flag Display In addition to channel status information the Dig Analyzer Protocol window also dis plays the Error Flags which indicate errors in the data stream When an error occurs the color of the LED changes from green to red As soon as the error disa...

Page 461: ...nal format that CRC checking has detected an error red In the Consumer format no CRC error is indicated green CH n inva lid indicates the status of the validity bit in the protocol Red means that the corresponding channel is invalid Remote command SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor PCM 1 2 on page 751 5 32 Lip Sync analysis Available only with the R S UPP K45 expanded audio video measurements option The Lip S...

Page 462: ...analyzer measurement function Example 1 Normal color change combination In the Lip Sync generator function a color change is configured between Mute Color pure green 0 4095 0 and Active Color pure red 4095 0 0 It is assumed that the DUT for all three color components causes color falsification of some bits which is to be covered with a tolerance specification of 100 bits The Mute Color must be out...

Page 463: ... this case no Video Trigger would be activated SCPI command SENSe 1 FUNCtion LIPSync Meas Time Determines the time period indicated with Measurement Time in the figure in which the audio and video signal are observed and the periodicity of the Lip Sync pattern together with the On Time set in the corresponding Lip Sync generator function The measurement time must always be greater than the On Time...

Page 464: ...ing and can be configured here if necessary In each case the decimal equivalent of 12 bit long numeric values is mapped With a lower color depth in the Color Depth selection field in the Config range of the generator the corresponding LSBs are not transmitted but set to 0 Remote command SENSe 1 LIPSync COLor THReshold LOW STRing on page 770 Active Color High The two thresholds Active Color Low and...

Page 465: ... Low This threshold defines the condition of the audio trigger for the Lip Sync measurement If the supplied audio data are processed in the device under test e g filtering a value greater than 0 should be defined In such a case the audio signal on the input side with defined signal and mute frames will no longer show any exact zero sample phases at the output of the device under test It should be ...

Page 466: ...asuring time SCPI command SENSe 1 FUNCtion BERT Meas Time Duration of the BERT measurement For a continuous measurement the measure ment is restarted after the measuring time expires Value The BERT measurement is performed inside a predefined time which has to be entered in the following parameter field Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion APERture MODE on page 753 SENSe 1 VOLTage APERture on page 754 ...

Page 467: ... frequency measurements the input signal beginning in the zero crossing must be observed over one complete period but with at least 100 samples For function measurements with an extremely short measurement time e g peak measurement 1 ms interval the frequency measurement should therefore be deactiva ted Frequency Frequency measurement is performed on all activated channels Freq Phase Only availabl...

Page 468: ... 2 2 where mes mes 1 2 The following points must be taken into consideration when selecting a frequency sweep for measuring the group delay The frequency step size and the number of sweep points must be selected such that no phase shifts of more than 180 occur between two consecutive sweep points The spacing should be linear with logarithmic spacing the fre quency increments at the bottom could be...

Page 469: ... 5 s If the Sam ple Freq measurement is activated therefore the total time required by a single measurement may be extended to up to 1 5 s Sample Freq Only available in the digital analyzer The measurement windows contain the sampling frequency In this measuring mode the audio frequency is not measured The sampling frequency is measured with a resolution of 22 9 mHz and an update interval of appro...

Page 470: ...ction selected Prec The frequency and if applicable phase measurement is optimized with respect to precision A precision FFT with up to 256 k points is used as the measurement basis The FFT length is automatically adapted to the measured signal frequency so that measurement can always be performed with the smallest possible FFT and therefore in the shortest possible time Depending on the activated...

Page 471: ...splayed continuously to Note The continuous phase display is mainly used for frequency sweeps to allow the phase characteristic to be displayed even in the case of phase displacement above 360 This measuring mode is usually unsuitable for measurements without frequency variation since such measurements do not have a valid previous value The continuous phase is measured by adding the phase differen...

Page 472: ...mote command SENSe2 FUNCtion OFF IPEak 5 36 Level Monitor The level monitor is a level meter which is used to determine the level downstream of the prefilter but upstream of the function specific digital filters For other level measurement options see Chapter 5 21 Level Measurements on page 359 and Chapter 5 35 Input Monitor on page 455 The level monitor works with period detection and measures th...

Page 473: ...C with DC measurement enabled or if the mode is switched to DC measurement with AC cou pling selected however the measurement is performed Note In the case of multitone signals without dominant components AC period detection cannot deliver reliable results in this case the DC result exhibits slightly larger fluctuations Peak A measurement of the input peak value is performed The numerically highes...

Page 474: ...ila ble Settings and syntax of remote commands are the same as for Level Monitor The two function monitors are controlled separately via suffix 2 and 6 The parameter syntax is the same except for PEAK suffix 2 vs IPEak suffix 6 Remote command Command for selecting the function of the Second Monitor SENSe2 FUNCtion SNDMonitor on page 771 5 38 Settling Methods 5 38 1 Applications Every signal that i...

Page 475: ...le This time is determined based on the continuously decreasing difference between succes sive measured values The settling method is particularly reliable when combined with a trigger condition as with an external sweep or an external level trigger In such cases the trigger condition is not fulfilled until a signal change is detected in the measured value and stabilizes over several measurements ...

Page 476: ...haracteristic tolerance band The capture range of this mask is determined by fixed tolerance limits In the case of very small tolerance values this algorithm yields a measurement result only after the DUT settles almost completely Exponential Settling uses a tolerance mask with an exponential characteristic toler ance funnel whose capture range enlarges toward the earlier measured values i e large...

Page 477: ...y short since only a single measurement is performed This setting is recommended if the DUT settling time can be ignored is known and taken into account by entering a fixed delay Exponential Function Settling is switched on and the exponential method is employed Since several measurements have to be performed the measurement time is considerably longer than if Function Settling is switched off Thi...

Page 478: ...ent and the last preceding measured value for each earlier measured value the tolerance value increases by a factor of 2 Remote command SENSe 1 FUNCtion SETTling TOLerance on page 772 Resolution The resolution value designates the maximum permissible absolute value by which the current measured value may differ from the preceding measured values in order to be accepted as settled although the tole...

Page 479: ...ate value i e a value between the old and the new value If the trigger threshold variation is smaller than the actual value change it may happen that even the measured intermediate value triggers the next measurement in a sweep This does not produce a falsified measured value Y value of the sweep display since the next measurement is not started until the signal change is detected However the swee...

Page 480: ...lay is actually attained Exponential The settling function is switched on for the frequency level monitoring routine and the exponential method is employed Since several mea surements have to be performed the response time to the detected signal change becomes longer This setting is recommended for external level sweeps and external level edge triggering since most DUTs exhibit an exponential leve...

Page 481: ...rigger value for each earlier trigger value the tolerance value increases by a factor of 2 Remote command SENSe 1 TRIGger SETTling TOLerance on page 772 Resolution The Resolution value designates the maximum permissible absolute value by which the current trigger value may differ from the preceding trigger values in order to be accepted as settled although the tolerance condition may be violated T...

Page 482: ...the 5th last measured value must be between 0 84 and 1 16 V For a distortion measurement with a result of 0 01 this means that the last measured value must be between 0 0099 and 0 0101 the 2nd last measured value must be between 0 0098 and 0 0102 the 3rd last measured value must be between 0 0096 and 0 0104 the 4th last measured value must be between 0 0092 and 0 0108 the 5th last measured value m...

Page 483: ...e measurement function Remote command INPut FILTer on page 773 5 39 2 Analyzer Function Filters In the Analyzer Function panel up to 2 of the user definable filters in the Filter panel or weighting filters can be looped into the measurement path regardless of which level measurement method is selected 5 39 3 Generator Filters Most of the generator signals can be filtered in the time domain A user ...

Page 484: ...he filter will always be less than the full scale level With both types of generator analog and digital any DC offset that has been config ured must be taken into account when setting the level 5 39 4 Filter Table Overview of the filters which can be set up in the analyzer and generator together with the remote control parameters Table 5 5 Filter Deactivated Display in Selection field Remote Contr...

Page 485: ...JITT Preemph 50 15 PEMP5015 Preemph 50 PEMP50 Preemph 75 PEMP75 Rumble unwtd URUM Rumble wtd WRUM Table 5 8 High Pass and Low Pass Display in Selection Field Remote Control Parameter High pass 22 Hz HP22 High pass 400 Hz HP400 Low pass 22 kHz LP22 Low pass 30 kHz LP30 Low pass 80 kHz LP80 AES 17 AES17 5 40 User Definable Filters In the Filter panel 9 filters defined as Filter 01 to Filter 09 can b...

Page 486: ...ttenuation The frequencies of the stopband are calculated and displayed taking the required stopband attenuation into consideration The implemented stopband attenuation is always equal to or greater than the specified value Apart from the parameters entered in the Filter panel the sampling rate must also be known to allow calculation of the filter The other parameters stop frequency delay and the ...

Page 487: ...Order Used to specify the filter order Only available for lowpass and highpass filters Low order filters have edges with a lower rate of rise but settle more quickly 4 4th Order Filter 8 8th Order Filter Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 ORDer on page 775 Passband Used to specify the corner frequency 0 1 dB of the passband in lowpass and high pass filters User Definable Filters ...

Page 488: ...elected passband and the stopband attenuation This value is only updated after the filter is activated Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 STOPb on page 775 5 40 3 Bandpass Filters and Bandstop Filters Figure 5 18 Bandpass frequency response with filter parameters Figure 5 19 Bandstop frequency response with filter parameters Passb Low Used to specify the lower corner frequency 0 1 dB of the passban...

Page 489: ... Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 STOPb LOWer on page 775 Stopb Upp Displays the upper cutoff frequency of the stopband in the case of bandpass and band stop filters the cutoff frequency is derived from the selected passband and the stop band attenuation This value is only updated after the filter is activated Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 STOPb UPPer on page 776 5 40 4 Notch Filter Third Oct...

Page 490: ...ed stopband attenuation Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 CENTer on page 774 Width For notch filter used to specify the difference between the upper and lower cutoff fre quency 0 1 dB of the passband For third octave and octave filter displays the width of the passband Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 WIDTh on page 776 Stopb Low Displays the lower cutoff frequency of the stopband the cutoff frequ...

Page 491: ...evel 5 40 5 1 File Def Filter File Def Filter A file can be loaded in which the filter is described either by the coefficients of the transfer function coe or by the poles and zeros zpz or npz and xpz in the z level The button opens a browser that can be used to select the filter file Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 FNAMe on page 775 5 40 5 2 Coefficients of the transfer function The filter in t...

Page 492: ...ned during the design stage i e the frequency response of the filter is standardized to this sampling rate If a different sampling rate is set in the R S UPP the frequency response changes accordingly File format npz Example See the RS_EXAM NPZ file in the D UPV USER directory Poles and zeros in the NPZ are standardized to the sampling frequency specified there If a different sampling rate is set ...

Page 493: ... possible Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 ATTenuation on page 774 Delay Displays the estimated settling time of the filter This value is only updated after the fil ter is activated Exception With file defined filters a settling time is calculated and displayed after the coefficients are read in This settling time can then be changed manually Remote command SENSe 1 UFILter n2 DELay on page 774 Sh...

Page 494: ...tional delay may be entered under Start Condition With continuous measurement the filter settling time is added only with the re start of the first measurement All further measurements in this case are performed without delay If a multichannel analyzer is used the signal is not monitored continuously during con tinuous measurement the filter settling time is therefore added with each subsequent me...

Page 495: ...IR 1k wtd Standards Standards CCIR Rec 468 4 DIN 45405 CCITT Rec N21 CISPR 6 76 ITU T J 16 Application Weighted noise measurement Filters CCIR 2k wtd Standards Dolby Application NAB standard Filters CCIR unwtd Standards Standards CCIR Rec 468 4 ITU T J 16 Application Bandpass from 22 4 Hz to 22 kHz for band limi ted unweighted measure ment to CCIR Weighting Filters ...

Page 496: ...c O 41 CISPR 6 76 ITU T Rec P 53 Application Psophometric weighting Filters C Message Standards IEEE 743 1995 Application Weighted noise measure ment Filters DC Noise HP Standards Standard ARD Spec 3 4 ARD Spec 12 2 Application Highpass filter for mea surement of DC noise tape recorders Weighting Filters ...

Page 497: ... J 17 Application Weighted noise measure ment Filters Deemph 50 15 Standards CCIR Rec 651 Application Compact disc Filters Deemph 50 Standards ARD Spec 5 3 1 Application Weighted noise measure ment Filters Deemph 75 Standards ARD Spec 5 3 1 Application Weighted noise measure ment Weighting Filters ...

Page 498: ...ards DIN IEC 60315 4 Application Measurements on FM tuners Filters Jitter wtd Standards AES 3 Application Application Weighting of jitter transfer function 1st order HP 3 dB at 700 Hz 20 dB at 70 Hz Filters Preemph 50 15 Standards CCIR Rec 651 Application Compact disc Weighting Filters ...

Page 499: ...ph 50 Standards ARD Spec 5 3 1 Application Weighted noise measure ment Filters Preemph 75 Standards ARD Spec 5 3 1 Application Weighted noise measure ment Filters Rumble unwtd Standards Standards DIN 368 3 DIN 45539 Application Unweighted noise mea surement Weighting Filters ...

Page 500: ...fields of the analyzer and generator Remote control command INPut 1 FILTer on page 773 HighPass 22 Hz Highpass 3rd order Butterworth with 3 dB cutoff frequency at 22 4 Hz HighPass 400 Hz Highpass 3rd order Butterworth with 3 dB cutoff frequency at 400 Hz LowPass 22 kHz Lowpass 4th order Butterworth with 3 dB cutoff frequency at 22 4 kHz LowPass 30 kHz Lowpass 3rd order Butterworth with 3 dB cutoff...

Page 501: ... monitor outputs BNC sockets on the rear panel permit the monitoring of analog or digital input signals referred to as Monitoring in this document both directly at the Audio Analyzer input and downstream of any filters that may be active The block diagram below shows the points along the signal processing path at which the signal is tapped and fed to the audio monitoring output Auxiliaries Panel ...

Page 502: ...l Voltage is generally offered in two channels i e it is unaffected by Signal Source Track Split Track Together Split Separate Remote command AUXiliaries SIGSource on page 777 Signal Source Sig Source 1 Sig Source 2 Used to select the monitoring point along the signal path Depending on the Signal Source Track Split setting the parameter field for both monitor outputs is provided together for Monit...

Page 503: ... external circuits Starting with serial numbers 120100 140100 180100 you can select in the fields Voltage 1 and Voltage 2 which DC level is output at which BNC socket at the rear of the instrument To supply devices under test or external circuits the R S UPP can out put two DC voltages in the range from 5 V to 5 V which can be set independent of each other In this case the two monitor outputs can ...

Page 504: ...e external keypad The entry window is closed again by clicking the cross in the top right hand corner using ENTER or pressing CTRL F9 again Remote command AUXiliaries SPEaker VOLume n3 on page 778 Enable For enabling or disabling the trigger output If the trigger output is deactivated there is a low level at the TRIGGER OUT BNC jack on the rear of the instrument Remote command AUXiliaries TRIGger ...

Page 505: ...llation can be found in the operating manual for the R S UPZ Audio Switcher Chapter Startup Installation of USB driver The R S UPZ may be used as an input switcher or an output switcher An input switcher makes it possible to connect up to eight different DUTs to the two analyzer inputs without having to change connectors each time An output switcher can supply up to eight DUTs with the generator c...

Page 506: ...ith Port setting Advanced you can determine the interface to report it with this parameter field to the control soft ware of the R S UPP or the COM interface listed in the Device Man ager is adjusted to the COM port selected in the R S UPP Auto All COM ports from 3 to 256 are searched for a connected switcher and if necessary the connection is established This search process takes longer than the ...

Page 507: ...tchers When one of the operator fields Input A B or Output A B is then used the other one s is are automatically adapted by the R S UPP in accordance with the offset that has been set Channels 0 are set to 0 that is the busbar is switched off Off Tracking is off and the channels can be connected independently of one another B vs A The channels are switched to an offset between the busbars A and B ...

Page 508: ...s to be connected to busbar B It is not possible to set this channel to busbar A If this is attempted a correction is made to the next higher or next lower channel number Remote command SWITcher INPB on page 779 Output A For entering the channel number of the output switcher that is to be connected to bus bar A This setting changes its significance when 1 is set under Output B see under that secti...

Page 509: ... to the next higher or next lower channel number Remote command SWITcher OUTB on page 780 5 45 Config panel This section describes the Config panel of the R S UPP where settings are made that affect the behavior of the instrument partly across all panels The panel is called up using the menu line GPIB Address Entering a IEC IEEE bus address Config panel ...

Page 510: ...g server port Please change the cascad ing port number appears If a connection has already been established between the master and slave but the port number is also being used by another tool the error message Cascading data handshake failed Please consider changing the cas cading port number appears The remedy in both cases is to modify the port num bers on all instruments in the cascade so that ...

Page 511: ... in vector format screenshots as bitmaps File The screen content selected under Source is output to a file speci fied under File Name The output is always as bitmap Clipboard The screen content selected under Source is output direct to the Windows clipboard and can be used direct in other applications The output is always as bitmap Note If the instrument is being remotely controlled from the Windo...

Page 512: ... of the required header and footer in the output activated The header and footer are visible deactivated The header and footer are not visible Remote command HCOPy PRINter ADDition on page 830 Define Header Desired text for the header Not available if Header Footer has been activated This text forms the title in the middle of the header line Remote command HCOPy PRINter HEADer on page 830 Define F...

Page 513: ...e for the output to a file Only available if Destination is set to File and Store Mode is not set to New The file selection box opens for you to change the filename see section Chapter 5 57 Loading and Saving on page 629 Enter the filename without an extension the File Type setting in the file selection box defines the file type Remote command HCOPy FILE on page 829 Menu bar always visible Permane...

Page 514: ...les This makes for convenient mouse operation deactivated For selecting files the R S UPP uses its integrated File Select win dow that is operated solely using an external keyboard Remote command SYSTem WINStyle on page 848 Query Longform Query response in short or long form activated The response to a SCPI query is in long form e g query TRIG ger SOURce Response CH1Freq deactivated The response t...

Page 515: ...mation see Chapter 8 6 1 Operating Method on page 863 All All master s settings are transferred to all slaves Master All master s settings only take effect locally on the master Slave xx All master s settings are transferred to a specific slave Remote command 5 46 Curve Spectrum and Bar Graph Display The most informative method of displaying measurement results is usually a two dimensional graphic...

Page 516: ...the bar graphs display the measurement results of the analyzer measurement functions THD THD N SINAD Mod Dist and DFD as bar graphs For information on how to set up the various display configurations see Chap ter 5 46 2 Calling Up on page 506 The individual elements in the trace and bar graph displays are virtually identical but for one or two exceptions Only a bar graph which requires a symbolic ...

Page 517: ...ntersects the trace o X Difference between ol and or xl The point to the left of the marker at which the X cursor intersects the trace xr The point to the right of the marker at which the X cursor intersects the trace x X Difference between xl and xr 3 Limit violations Limit violations are indicated by red dots on traces or by red bars in bar graphs 4 Main grid subgrid Set in the associated DispCo...

Page 518: ...s 10 Scan number Multiscan mode When you use the Next Scan toggle key to scroll through the scans the current value is entered here Number 0 means the most recent scan The lower the negative number the older the scan The of 4 shown in the example indicates the currently set history and informs the user how many scans are stored in the memory or saved in the file This value is set in the associated...

Page 519: ...of the label and unit set with See Chapter 5 46 3 Parameter Fields of the Panel on page 508 13 Limit display Limit Upper Limit Upper is activated and there is no limit violation Limit Lower Limit Lower is activated and there is no limit violation Limit Upper past The Limit Upper value has been violated in the past but there is cur rently no limit violation The violation is indicated until the STAR...

Page 520: ...system Bargraph1 2 the minimum and maximum values are shown as small white blocks To be set in the upper part of the associated panel via the parameter field The min max curves are to be thought of as scans of a multiscan display If Show Min Max is on there is a single scan from three scans 18 Limit line Fixed limit value or fixed limit value curve from a file for activation in the associated Disp...

Page 521: ...ed from each Display Config Panel using or directly from the menu bar Figure 5 22 Display menu for two and multichannel instruments 21 Marker Marking of the value on the x axis from which the left and right intersections of a hori zontal cursor will be displayed with the curve Additionally for the graphic systems FFT Graph1 2 Marking of a value on the x axis from which harmonics are calculated Cur...

Page 522: ...stination parameter field is set to File or Clip board With a reduction of the resolution picture elements such as axis labels can be omitted Compared to the Copy function the shortcut CTRL C copies the graphic to the clipboard with the exact resolution and aspect ratio as shown on the monitor Config Opens the corresponding DispConfig panel Preview Shows a print preview if the print source Source ...

Page 523: ...ig to Sweep Graph4 Config The panel is used to configure the display of measurement results from a measure ment sequence sweep as a diagram in the Cartesian coordinate system Two dependent values can be displayed as TRACE A and Trace B over an independent x axis FFT Graph in two windows Listed in the menu as FFT Graph1 Config and FFT Graph2 Config The panel offers the configuration for displaying ...

Page 524: ...e omitted or differ ent parameter lists may appear in the selection fields For example the display configuration panels for FFT and Sweep offer various choices for the sources of the measurement results The differences are explained for the individual parameter fields Sweep for two channel instrument FFT for two channel instrument Sweep for a multichannel instrument The source of the measurement r...

Page 525: ...indow As the name says settings from the first window are copied into all the sub system s other windows This happens once when the Exec button is pressed This copying process is performed for almost all commands following a new installation of the R S UPP If only specific command areas are to be transferred from the first window to the sub sequent windows limitations can be set in the dialog box ...

Page 526: ...asurement sequence and the toggle key Next Scan can be used to choose between three scans Multi With this setting not just one measurement sequence or pair of measurement sequences Trace A and Trace B is recorded loaded and displayed but any number of sequences and sequence pairs However only the number selected in the History parameter field is stored internally and written to file or read from f...

Page 527: ...values will be restarted each time the START key is pressed If Min Max scans have already been recorded and measurement is stopped the Min Max curves can be hidden and shown by selecting and unselecting the checkbox A MIN MAX display is also possible for graphic systems which do not have any scans e g FFT Graph i e a MIN scan and a MAX scan are recorded The Show Min Max function is not available i...

Page 528: ...w Min Max is used to display the min and max values of all curves bars in white In addition to the measurement result source Y source the left y axis label ing shows the activated channels e g FFT level Ch 1234 dBV Remote command DISPlay BARGraph n2 MCHMode on page 800 DISPlay FFT n2 MCHMode on page 800 Y Source Sweep Graph graphic system Used to select which sweep measurement results obtained fro...

Page 529: ...leted Funct Chx Function The function measurement result obtained by means of a generator sweep with the set analyzer measurement function for channel 1 or channel 2 or the channel number specified under the following Channel parameter field in the case of a multichannel instrument is displayed as Trace A or Trace B over a basic physical unit selected under x axis The measurement result is display...

Page 530: ... measurement function for channel 1 or channel 2 or the channel number specified under the following Channel parameter field in the case of a multichannel instrument is displayed as Trace A or Trace B over a basic physical quantity selected under x axis The measurement result is displayed in the numeric display LevMon DC Chx LevMon DC The DC measurement result of the additional LevelMonitor DC mea...

Page 531: ...al InputMonitor Peak measurement function for channel 1 or channel 2 or the channel number specified under the following Channel parameter field in the case of a multichannel instrument is displayed as Trace A or Trace B over a basic physical quantity selected under x axis The measurement result is displayed in the numeric display Phase The Phase measurement result of the additional Frequ Phase Fr...

Page 532: ...r field Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A YSOurce on page 798 DISPlay SWEep n2 B YSOurce on page 798 Y Source FFT Graph graphic system Used to select which measurement results obtained with the FFT or Post FFT analyzer measurement function are displayed graphically as TRACE A or as TRACE B Section of the Analyzer Function panel For more information on Y Source see Chapter 5 51 Measured value Seque...

Page 533: ...stic versus the frequency of channel 1 or channel 2 or the channel number specified under the following Channel parameter field in the case of a multichannel instrument of the FFT or Post FFT analyzer measurement function which is dis played as Trace A or Trace B over a frequency x axis Curve Spectrum and Bar Graph Display ...

Page 534: ...tichannel instrument of the FFT or Post FFT analyzer measurement function which is dis played as Trace A or Trace B over a frequency x axis In contrast to a comparably slow frequency sweep with phase mea surement the phase measurement using FF provides very rapid phase measurement results Figure 5 23 The yellow trace shows the phase characteristic near the 10 kHz fre quency line File Trace A Trace...

Page 535: ...e 601 Off No trace is displayed or an available trace is deleted Level Chx Level The level measurement result for channel 1 or channel 2 or the channel number specified under the following Channel parameter field in the case of a multichannel instrument of the Waveform measurement function is displayed as Trace A or Trace B over a time x axis File Trace A Trace A is loaded from a file The file nam...

Page 536: ...rd Octave or 1 n Octave is displayed over an x axis that is to scale File Trace A Trace A is loaded from a file The file name is entered in the subse quent parameter field File Trace B Trace B is loaded from a file The file name is entered in the subse quent parameter field Remote command DISPlay BARGraph n2 A YSOurce on page 798 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B YSOurce on page 798 Trace File All graphic sys...

Page 537: ...eparate parameter fields For Y Source OFF File Trace A or File Trace B a channel specification is meaningless and this parameter field is hidden Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Ch1 to Ch8 Channel number 1 to 8 Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A CHANnel on page 790 DISPlay SWEep n2 B CHANnel on page 790 Track If a checkbox is available in the Track column the settin...

Page 538: ...SWEep n2 TRACk REFerence on page 801 DISPlay SWEep n2 TRACk SCALing on page 801 Label Auto This setting is for whether the label for the left Trace A or right Trace B y axis is oriented on the setting in the Y Source parameter field or is freely configurable Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph activated The label which is selected under TRACE A or Trace B i e the name...

Page 539: ...quences on page 601 Alive New measured values are displayed Hold The last trace remains in the display Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A UPDate on page 797 DISPlay SWEep n2 B UPDate on page 797 Reference Used to select the reference for referenced units e g dBr V Vr or ΔHz for Trace A or Trace B Can be a single integer value or a reference trace The reference can be a sequence of measured values t...

Page 540: ...c system the result of the Input Peak measurement for channel 1 is selected as the source for Trace A The measurement results of the additional Input Monitor Peak mea surement function are therefore plotted as Trace A on the Y1 axis In the Input Config panel the reference value for the additional mea surement function is set to 0 2222 V If Reference is now set to Meas Panel the reference value fro...

Page 541: ...result of the channel specified in the Ana lyzer Config panel under Ref Channel is saved as a reference value If a referenced unit is selected in the Unit parameter field the measurement result is referenced to this variable reference value and displayed Meas Ch1 Moving reference value Every level measurement result for channel 1 is saved as reference value and used as a referenced display provide...

Page 542: ...es are made to the reference value or reference trace If a trace file having a reference value or reference trace is loa ded the reference values from the file have no effect and the refer ence value or reference trace last set is used If a floating reference value Meas Ch1 Meas Ch2 or Gen Track was set before the switchover to Hold this reference trace is used If Hold is selected in the absence o...

Page 543: ...rence VALue on page 795 Reference File File name for the reference parameter File Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A REFerence FILE on page 795 DISPlay SWEep n2 B REFerence FILE on page 795 Normalize If a referenced unit e g dBr or V Vr and a floating reference value as in Reference Meas Ch1 Meas Ch2 Gen Track or a reference trace he...

Page 544: ...pose the referenced trace value is read out and the reciprocal value is entered in the parameter field below The parame ter then changes back to VALUE X Cursor As for the o cursor Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A NORMalize on page 794 DISPlay SWEep n2 B NORMalize on page 794 Normalize Value Used to enter a fixed normalization value as a factor This value applies to all scans Available in the grap...

Page 545: ...MS measurement function can be transferred to the Dis play panel which is indicated by the Unit Fnct Track checkboxes Example For the additional measurement function Waveform there is no individually assigned unit that may be set in a Config panel Thus no unit can be transferred from the ana lyzer for the Waveform graphics subsystem and the checkboxes for Unit Fnct Track are not offered here Avail...

Page 546: ...ue Limit Upper Value Limit Shift Parallel Limit Shift Symmetrical in the event of changing between different units e g dBV W a value entered earlier is retrieved deactivated The unit can be user selected from the list of available parameters If a logarithmic unit dBu dBV dBr dBm or dBFS is selected here the parameter field below Spacing cannot be accessed and its parameter is set to Lin it would b...

Page 547: ...el Limit Shift Symmetrical in the event of changing between different units e g dBV W a value entered earlier is retrieved Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT on page 796 DISPlay SWEep n2 B UNIT on page 796 Unit Auto Used to determine whether the unit label displayed on the y axis for Trace A or Trace B is the same as the unit se...

Page 548: ...ere rotated by 90 Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT AUTO on page 797 DISPlay SWEep n2 B UNIT AUTO on page 797 Unit User String User defined unit designation if Unit Auto is not selected The specified designation appears on the y axis label instead of the usual units Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT USER on page 797 DISPla...

Page 549: ...raphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Exec Pressing this button triggers a one time scaling process which uses the minimum and maximum values of the existing measurement sequence for Trace A or Trace B The end values of the new scaling are approx 5 less or greater than the exact values The determined values are entered in the Top and Bottom parameter fields below If the Track checkbox is...

Page 550: ...n any negative numbers e g V W etc has been selected in the Unit Fnct Track parameter field Example Although V is a linear unit the measurement results can be nega tive which means that logarithmic display is not possible Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A SPACing on page 796 DISPlay SWEep n2 B SPACing on page 796 Top Used to set the top value of the y axis for Trace A or Trace B If Auto Scale has ...

Page 551: ...with main gridlines One or two 3 or 4 8 or 9 main gridlines are displayed depending on the scale end values Main gridlines may be hidden if the graphical window is reduced in size Divisions Only selectable with the setting Spacing Lin Preset division of a y axis with main gridlines The desired number of divisions is set in the parameter field below These main gridlines are not hidden if the graphi...

Page 552: ...h the setting Spacing Lin Subdivision of the main gridlines of a y axis into 2 4 or 5 sections If for example 2 is selected the area between two main gridlines is divided into 2 sections i e one subgridline appears between the main gridlines These subgridlines are not hidden if the graphical window is reduced in size Coarse Fine With the setting Spacing Log Coarse or fine subdivision of the main g...

Page 553: ...n the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMUpper on page 793 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMUpper on page 793 Source Used to determine how the upper limit is set Value Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Input of a fixed limit value for the Source Value setting In the parameter field below an upper limit constant for all X value...

Page 554: ... file is loaded that con tains a limit scan in addition to the data scans The Limit Upper curve from the trace file is displayed in the graph and all scans are compared to this limit curve except the Min Max scans Hold Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph PESQ POLQA Impulse Response Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph The limit value or limit trace is no longer changed If a t...

Page 555: ...efined for the measurement whereby each mea sured value is compared with the limit limit curve The limit limit curve is plotted in red in the coordinate system of the graphical display Limit violations are marked by red dots on a curve or by red bars on a bar graph An additional display in the bottom right corner of the graphical display with an arrow pointing downward marks the underranging of th...

Page 556: ... fields higher up is used All scans of a trace are compared to this common limit and the limit violations are marked File Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Bar Graph Available to all graphic systems except Waveform Limits are checked by using a limit file The name of the limit file is entered in the parameter field below This limit file contains reference values for a limit curve in a...

Page 557: ...but instead the previously set limit value or limit trace is used If Hold is selected when no valid limit trace data is already available a warning is issued and the last valid Limit selection is reset Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMLower SOURce on page 792 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMLower SOURce on page 792 Source Value Lower limit value if Value has been selected under Source Available in the g...

Page 558: ...mit lines or limit curves to be parallel shifted In this way limit curves derived from a golden unit for example can be adapted very easily to new circumstances The limit lines which were determined using 100 dBV and 150 dBV are to be paral lel shifted by a value of 25 dBV to 75 dBV and 125 dBV Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMS...

Page 559: ...aveform Bar Graph Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMShift SYMMetrical on page 793 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical on page 793 New scan This parameter field appears only for graphic systems that allow multiscans Scan Multi and is therefore only available for Sweep Graph 1 to 4 graphic systems Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep Replace means that a selected scan of the current tra...

Page 560: ...r field appears only for graphic systems that allow multiscans Scan Multi and is therefore available to the following graphic system Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep It is used to enter the name of a trace file whose scans are to replace a current scan or are to be appended to the current trace Whether scans are to be replaced or appended is determined in the New scan parameter field abo...

Page 561: ...field is operable and the user can select the functionality When the x source in the display panel is set to Sweep and when a z sweep is set in the generator and when the number of z sweep points in the generator is larger than the number of scans set in History the number of sweep points from the generator will be entered in the History field Hold The x axis is displayed as not operable The x axi...

Page 562: ...measured in addition to the distortion From these two series of measurements it is possible to generate a trace data set and save it as a trace file using Visual Basic for example in order to graphi cally display the data set with the setting Manual and the following x axis Voltage parameter field LevMon RMS The measured level monitor RMS value is plotted on the x axis if the level monitor is on L...

Page 563: ...eep Graph1 4 and by the sweep set ting of the generator See Chapter 5 46 3 Parameter Fields of the Panel on page 508 Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep Time Depending on the current sweep setting the x axis is displayed as the time axis Voltage Depending on the current sweep setting the x axis is displayed as the analog level axis Frequency Depending on the current sweep setting the x axis...

Page 564: ...g of the x axis as well as the units available for the Ref Value reference value for referenced units The list of units is determined by the setting in the x axis parameter field If Fre quency is selected in that field frequency units are offered here If Voltage is selected in that field voltage units are offered and so on Recorded measurement sequences can be redisplayed with different units at a...

Page 565: ...t engineering symbol The x axis is labeled with Engineering and Unit Label Auto Used to determine whether the x axis label is the same as that set in the x axis param eter field or whether the label can be user selected Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform activated The label in the x axis parameter field is displayed in gray cannot be accessed in the text field to the right of ...

Page 566: ...r defined unit label can be entered Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 X UNIT AUTO on page 803 Unit User String User defined unit designation if Unit Auto is not selected This designation appears on the y axis label instead of the usual unit Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 X UNIT USER on page 803 Ref Value Reference value with unit for reference...

Page 567: ... obtained values Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 X SCALing on page 802 Spacing Linear or logarithmic spacing of the x axis For logarithmic units dB units and linear units in which negative numbers can occur e g V W this parameter field is displayed as not user accessible and is set to Lin since it makes no sense is not possible to display dB values or negative values logarithmically Available in t...

Page 568: ...a logarithmic divided x axis with the aid of main gridlines Auto Coarse Auto Medium Auto Fine With Spacing Lin Coarse medium or fine division of an x axis with main gridlines One to two 3 to 4 or 8 to 9 main gridlines are displayed depending on the scale end values Main gridlines may be hidden if the graphical window is reduced in size Divisions With Spacing Lin Preset division of an x axis with m...

Page 569: ...FT Waveform Sub Grid Subdivision of the main gridlines in a graphical display using subgridlines Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Off Subgridlines are deactivated 2 4 5 With Spacing Lin Subdivision of the main gridlines in a linearly divided x axis into 2 4 or 5 sections If for example 2 is selected the y axis is divided into two sections i e one subgridline appears between ...

Page 570: ...exts in the graphical displays Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 TITLe SHOW on page 800 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LEGend SHOW on page 791 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LEGend SHOW on page 791 Title Descript Leg A Descript Leg B Descript Input fields for free text for display in the graphical displays Available in the graphics subsystems Sweep FFT Waveform Bar Graph Remote command DISPlay SWEep n2 TITLe DESCription on...

Page 571: ...or equalization file is loaded again regardless of whether or not Modify Equ is enabled Then whenever a new equalization file is saved the precor rector becomes immediately effective on the next sweep scan If the name of the stored equalization file and of the equalization file used in the generator are not identical a warning is issued to notify that the newly created equalization file will now b...

Page 572: ...race This is offered for Store Trace as an Equalization List or Limit List and specifies whether the data set of Trace A or Trace B will be used for creating the corresponding lists Remote command MMEMory SWEep n2 TRACe on page 804 Norm Freq This is offered for Store Trace as Equalization List This specifies the frequency whose voltage value is used for normalization If the fre quency selected is ...

Page 573: ...and the fre quency response curve is acquired An equalization file is created from this trace and made available to the generator Another sweep is started using the equalization file and the frequency response is acquired The frequency response now seems considerably better though the expected straight line has not appeared and there are inaccuracies in regions showing greater generator level incr...

Page 574: ...List if the Offset checkbox is activated It is an additive value for generating limit files based on the trace data set of an ideal DUT Generating two limit files one with a positive and the other with a negative offset allows a tolerance band to be generated Remote command MMEMory SWEep n2 LIMit OFFSet VALue on page 804 Store Trace to This stores the current trace complete with all scans in the f...

Page 575: ... shown as an exponent Scan This is a display for the current scan and an opportunity to select a scan in the graphi cal display For those graphic systems that allow multiscan recording Sweep Graph 1 to 4 the desired scan can be selected here Number 0 means the most recent scan The lower the negative number the older the scan Scans identified as Min and Max are available to all graphic systems prov...

Page 576: ...rily show hide graphical display of Trace A Show B Ditto for Trace B Back Move back by one menu level Autoscale Single scaling of coordi nate system using mini mum and maximum val ues A For Trace A B Ditto for Trace B A B Ditto for Trace A and B X axis Ditto for x axis All Ditto for Trace A B and x axis Back Move back by one menu level Cursor Cursor settings O X Used to determine whether O or X cu...

Page 577: ...ext Peak Movement between par tial curve peaks Next Harmonic FFT display movement between harmonics Back Move back by one menu level X Cursor X cursor settings X Active Activate deactivate X cursor X Vert A X cursor becomes verti cal cursor on Trace A X Vert B Ditto on Trace B X Vert A B Ditto on Trace A and Trace B and shows dif ference between Y val ues X Hor A X cursor becomes hori zontal curso...

Page 578: ...position of Marker B Value to a value that can be entered later Back Move back by one menu level Set X Cursor Sets X cursor Max to trace maximum Min ditto for minimum Marker A to position of Marker A Marker B to position of Marker B Value to a value that can be entered later Back Move back by one menu level Back Move back by one menu level Marker Marker settings Trace A Marker settings for Trace A...

Page 579: ...of X cursor Set to Value Set marker to a value that can be entered later Track to Max Set marker to maximum of Trace B Marker changes with maximum Harm Harmonics are calculated and displayed based on X position of marker Back Move back by one menu level Zoom Increase reduce size of graphical display Act Curs In Size of graphical display is increased around active cursor solid line If active cursor...

Page 580: ... A For Trace A B Ditto for Trace B A B Ditto for Trace A and B X axis Ditto for x axis All Ditto for Trace A B and x axis Back Move back by one menu level Restart Min Max Lim Violation Deletes Min Max curves and limit violation sym bols for graphical display and restarts collection of Min Max data and check ing of limit violations MinMax A Min Max curves of Trace A MinMax B Ditto for Trace B MinMa...

Page 581: ...erent values such as voltage and phase The measurement function relevant to the measured value display is set in the Analyzer Function panel and the measurement function relevant to the trace dis play is selected from the Graphics Configuration panel at Y Source The graph shows a single sweep on Trace A green and Trace B yellow In addition the setting produces two further scans in which the Min an...

Page 582: ...scaled and reloaded as a single unit With the generator a second sweep the Z sweep is possible in addition to the X sweep It is called the Z sweep because it is usually displayed on the z axis of a 3D coordinate system When this operating mode is selected the number of scans set under History is automatically set to the number of Z points Generally in a graphical window which allows scans to be re...

Page 583: ...ed colors In the case of automatic scaling of the y axis all available traces are taken into account in order to determine the maxima and min ima All other actions e g setting the cursor to the Min or Max value always relate to the current scan For limit violation monitoring which is set up using all traces are checked against the same two limit curves The symbol for limit violation always relates...

Page 584: ... Common x axis So that any number of traces can be used as reference or displayed simultaneously for comparison and measured with the cursors such traces should actually all have the same X values The R S UPP however can use any X divisions by interpolating the measured value sequences reference traces and limit curves onto the current x axis The Equalization Lists are also interpolated on the x a...

Page 585: ...cate the direction in which a cursor left the display window 3 Measured value with limit violation A limit violation which is identified by red dots red bars on the traces and bar graphs is indicated by red measured values in the result list 4 Cursor markers A colored rectangular marking indicates the row containing the value at which the cur sor is located also applies to traces and bar graphs o ...

Page 586: ...e Limit Upper value has been violated in the past but there is cur rently no limit violation The violation is indicated until the START key is pressed again Limit Lower past The Limit Lower value has been violated in the past but there is cur rently no limit violation The violation is indicated until the START key is pressed again Limit Upper current The Limit Upper value is currently being violat...

Page 587: ...rs together with the cursor at the center of the display In the columns for the Y values of Trace A and Trace B digits highlighted in color by pressing the Selection softkey indicate whether the measurement result is violating the Limit Upper and or Limit Lower parameters or whether the value is a harmonic or a peak Hidden sections of the data set can be shown in the display window using the scrol...

Page 588: ... above the values on the x axis is the same as the unit set in the Unit Funct Track or Unit parameter field or whether it can be user selected Limit Upper If a Limit Upper value or scan is set here the measured values which violate the limit are displayed in red if Limit Upper or LimUpp Low is set under the Selection soft key Limit Lower If a Limit Lower value or scan is set here the measured valu...

Page 589: ...alues of the harmonics can be applied to the list display by setting Harmonics under the Selection softkey There are gaps in the numbering of the values on the left side of the window Scan This field and option in the graphical display also appears in the result list It indicates the selected scan for Sweep Graph 1 to 4 graphic subsystems which have multi scan recording The current value for the r...

Page 590: ...listed in the result list All All Lim upper Only those values which over range the upper limit Lim lower Only those values which under range the lower limit Lim upp low Only those values which over range the upper limit and under range the lower limit Harmonics Only harmonics Peaks Partial trace maxima 5 48 Numeric display The numeric display provides a clear overview of max 8 measurement results ...

Page 591: ...lay Explanation of the Elements The explanation of the elements is based on the numeric display for two channel instruments For analog analyzers the only difference are the additional lines Ch3 to Ch8 The number of simultaneously displayed channels can be set for multichannel instru ment in the Config panel in the panel section Numeric Display Configuration with the Max Ch Disp parameter field The...

Page 592: ...n the Function field 5 Measurement result for Level Monitor column 2 Measurement results for the set Level Monitor function 6 Measurement result for Input Monitor column 3 Measurement results for the Input Monitor function 7 Measurement result for the Freq Phase measurement function column 4 Measurement result for the Freq Phase measurement function With the setting Frequency or Sample Freq either...

Page 593: ...vated in the analyzer panel No measurement result is available yet 10 Copy Config Right clicking anywhere calls up a context menu left clicking on one of the entries exe cutes the corresponding function Copy Copies measured value and unit as ASCII character string to the clipboard same as CTRL C Config Opens the corresponding DispConfig panel Max Ch Disp The number of simultaneously displayed chan...

Page 594: ...enu however the softkey func tions of the combo displays affect the way in which the measurement results are dis played For more detailed information see Chapter 5 49 Combi Display on page 578 5 49 Combi Display It is often the case that the measurement results in the numeric display do not contain adequate information Additional features such as analog bargraphs limit monitoring or the storage of...

Page 595: ...ART key was pressed set with 3 Measurement display Current measured value If the measured value changes to red there is a limit violation 4 Limit marker Displays the lower and upper limit specified under in the bargraph 5 Bargraph Green Displays the measurement result as a bar on a scale If the bar changes to red there is a limit violation Blue Min Max bargraph The ends of the blue bar indicate th...

Page 596: ...eset by START or by entering a new lower upper limit 7 Scaling Measurement range of the bargraph set with 8 Unit Unit of the bargraph set with 9 Main gridlines subgridlines Main gridlines and subgridlines set with 10 Copy Config Right clicking anywhere calls up a context menu left clicking on one of the entries exe cutes the corresponding function Copy Copies measured value and unit as ASCII chara...

Page 597: ...bo display directly via the menu bar The menus differ slightly in two channel or multichannel instruments Select a measurement result configuration panel from the menu field as follows Click the Show button in the Display field of the configuration panel possible only for two channel instruments The measurement result configuration panels are used to determine how measure ment results are displaye...

Page 598: ...or the additional measurement function Input Peak are displayed Freq Phase Config The panel is used to configure how the measurement results for the additional measurement function Freq Phase are displayed The illustration below shows the assignment of the analyzer measurement functions to the measurement result configuration panels and the measurement result displays 5 49 3 Parameter Fields of th...

Page 599: ... displays of Function Level Monitor and Input Monitor in the case of multichannel instruments all channels are config ured fully identically therefore only one column is provided For two and multichan nel instruments the configuration panel of the pure frequency measurement always has one column Combi Display ...

Page 600: ...title bar Copy to Ch2 Only for two channel instruments For two channel measurements the Copy to Ch2 function is available for the Func tion Config Level Mon Config and Input Config measurement result configuration panels As the name says the parameter fields from the first channel are transferred to the second channel This happens once for almost all parameter fields when the Exec but ton is press...

Page 601: ... unit in which negative numbers can occur e g V W is selected the following parameter field Spacing is displayed as not user accessible and its parameter is set to Lin since it makes no sense to display measurement values with a logarithmic unit or negative values on a logarithmically scaled axis Remote command SENSe 1 2 6 UNIT on page 813 SENSe3 FREQuency UNIT on page 807 SENSe3 PHASe UNIT on pag...

Page 602: ... display To allow this the unit label can be changed from dBr to dBspl Remote command SENSe 1 2 6 UNAuto on page 812 SENSe 1 2 6 USERunit on page 813 SENSe3 FREQuency UNAuto on page 807 SENSe3 FREQuency USERunit on page 808 SENSe3 PHASe UNAuto on page 811 SENSe3 PHASe USERunit on page 811 Engineering Computes the measurement results in the numeric display field and in the combo dis play using a po...

Page 603: ...sed to set the number of digits used to display the measurement result limits and Min Max values resolution x dig x dB Significance of the parameter list using an example 5 dig 0 001 dB 5 dig Values which are displayed with a linear unit V Hz etc are output with 5 digits 0 001 dB Values which are displayed with a logarithmic unit dBV dBu etc are output to three decimal places If the numerical valu...

Page 604: ...rent measurement result for the specified channel is stored under Value when the ENTER key is pressed or the mouse key is clicked this measurement result is then displayed as the new refer ence value The reference value does not change while measure ments are being performed These options are only available for two channel or multichannel measurement Meas Ch1 Meas Ch2 These options are only availa...

Page 605: ... for the scaling process The determined values are entered in the Left and Right parame ter fields below For multichannel instruments the lowest minimum value and the highest maximum value of all open combo displays are deter mined and entered for all channels in the Left and Right parameter fields below Spacing Linear or logarithmic spacing of the bargraph Lin Linear spacing of the bargraph If a ...

Page 606: ...ed when Spacing Log in which case they cannot be entered Remote command SENSe 1 2 6 RIGHt on page 812 SENSe3 FREQuency RIGHt on page 807 SENSe3 PHASe RIGHt on page 811 Main Grid Division of the bargraph with vertical main gridlines Off No main gridlines are used in the bargraph On With the setting Spacing Log Decadic division of a logarithmically divided bargraph with main gridlines Auto Coarse Au...

Page 607: ... with linear scaling If for example 2 is entered the bargraph is divided into two sections i e one main gridline is displayed Steps With the setting Spacing Lin Used to enter the main gridline step size for a bargraph with linear scaling The unit of the value is not linked to the unit selected in the Unit parameter field the value can be given in different units Sub Grid Subdivision of the main gr...

Page 608: ...e setting Spacing Log Coarse or fine subdivision of the main gridlines of a logarithmically divided bargraph with subgridlines Figure 5 29 Coarse Subgridlines 2 and 5 only Figure 5 30 Fine All subgridlines Limit Lower Used to activate deactivate the lower limit check Combi Display ...

Page 609: ...ion no longer exists the measurement result and bargraph are displayed in green again A red measured value in the numeric display also indicates a limit vio lation In order to monitor limit violations over a long period of time without having to watch the measurement result display continuously the lower limit is displayed permanently in red as soon as it is under ranged after the START key has be...

Page 610: ...y LIMLower VALue on page 806 SENSe3 Frequency phase or group delay measurement SENSe3 PHASe LIMLower on page 810 SENSe3 PHASe LIMLower VALue on page 810 SENSe3 Frequency phase or group delay measurement Limit Upper Used to activate deactivate the upper limit check Combi Display ...

Page 611: ...tion no longer exists the measurement result and bargraph are displayed in green again A red measured value in the numeric display also indicates a limit vio lation In order to monitor limit violations over a long period of time without having to watch the measurement result display continuously the upper limit is displayed permanently in red as soon as it is over ranged after the START key has be...

Page 612: ...ighest val ues measured since START START resets min max value recording and the collection of mea sured values begins again deactivated The Min Max display is deactivated 5 49 4 Softkey Menu Two channel instruments Every combo display has its own softkey menu The settings selected in the menu apply exclusively to the associated combo display and affect no other combo display Multichannel instrume...

Page 613: ... limit is displayed Corresponds to in the associated configuration panel Restart Min Max Resets min max value recording and the collection of measured values begins again Corresponds to START Restart Lim Violation Resets the red color marking measured value bar and limit for indicat ing a limit violation and restarts a test for a limit violation Config Opens the configuration panel for this combo ...

Page 614: ...r Manual 1411 1055 32 10 Limit entered as a curve A limit curve can be entered only for the graphic systems Sweep FFT Function and Bar Graph A limit curve makes no sense for the Waveform graphic system and is not offered Limit Monitoring ...

Page 615: ...as a red dot in the trace display or as a red bar in the bar graph If multi scan recording is performed in the Sweep Graph 1 4 graphic subsystems all of the scans of a trace are checked against the associated limit or limit curve In the list of measured values rows with measured values out of the tolerance are dis played in red see Chapter 5 47 Result List on page 568 Limit Monitoring ...

Page 616: ...mit Upper past The Limit Upper value has been violated in the past but there is cur rently no limit violation The violation is indicated until the START key is pressed again Limit Lower past The Limit Lower value has been violated in the past but there is cur rently no limit violation The violation is indicated until the START key is pressed again Limit Upper current The Limit Upper value is curre...

Page 617: ...ting of acquired function measurement results sweeps FFT data Waveform data or Bar Graph data can be stored in a file for differ ent purposes To load the measured values again as a report to permit comparison or to allow processing at a later stage When loaded using commands in the display panel the series of measured values are initially displayed exactly as they were when saved They can however ...

Page 618: ...formation affects the corresponding DispConfig panel so that the parameter fields reproduce the information stored in the file Exception Exception If Hold is set in the parameter fields Reference Limit Upper and or Limit Lower the current settings are not overwritten The format in which the trace list is stored is the same for all subsystems If the file name is specified without an extension the s...

Page 619: ...ns any desired sweep axis Since the individual values of X are extracted from a current measured value sequence they are in ascending order If the file is then manually processed the separations of the sweep points can be freely selected in order to place a greater number at places of particular interest without dras tically increasing the total number of sweep points The sweep points must however...

Page 620: ...st contain at least two different points forming a straight line If a limit list is saved from a multiscan display including the Min Max scans in the case of a single scan display the Y values are extracted from the currently selected scan The file can contain a maximum of 1024 X Y pairs If the file name is specified without an extension the suggested file name extension is LIM but any desired ext...

Page 621: ...ion For example a Bar Graph trace file with 9 frequency lines in a bar graph display would be rejected for the measurement function DFD because only 5 lines are expected there However if there is ever a need to load a trace file of a different type into a graphic system acceptance of the file can be forced through by changing the trace file identi fier in an ASCII editor see section Chapter 5 55 E...

Page 622: ...e this would be Limit Upper or Limit Lower with the setting Value but instead a trace and that this trace has been taken from a file loaded at Y Source File Trace A or File Trace B Furthermore all Auto and Tracking checkboxes such as Label Auto Unit Func Track Unit Auto etc are deactivated and grayed out so that they cannot be used All parame ter fields that allow Auto settings such as X Source or...

Page 623: ...Ch1 and file e g File Trace A a trace is always deleted when the basic unit changes 5 53 1 1 Switching measurements in multiscan mode The reaction of the R S UPP depends largely on whether or not the basic unit changes Example Basic unit does not change The RMS measurement function is set in the analyzer The selected display unit is dBV Funct CH1 is set in the Sweep Graph Config panel as the Y Sou...

Page 624: ...halted On switching from a measurement to loading a trace from a file e g Y Source from Funct CH1 to File Trace A deletion takes place and the trace from the file is dis played immediately provided the basic unit is permitted in the current graphic subsys tem and the basic unit is suitable for the x axis The panel content changes according to the parameters stored in the trace file as described ab...

Page 625: ...m file If Y Source is switched to measurement the Alive Hold parameter field is again accessible and has the setting Alive On switching from Scan Single to Scan Multi the single scan is retained and New Scan is forced to the Append mode New scans are added each time the Single button is pressed On switching from Scan Multi to Scan the last scan of the current multiscan is retained 5 53 1 6 Appendi...

Page 626: ...import a file is ignored and a message is issued If the parameter field Alive Hold is on Alive and a measurement is finished a scan multiple scans can be imported from a file and appended to the existing scans If an import is allowed it largely depends on the content of the source file to be impor ted whether and how the operation proceeds A file will be imported only if the basic units from the f...

Page 627: ...d If the parameter field Alive Hold is on Alive and a measurement is finished a scan can be imported from a file and replace a scan If the default settings agree it largely depends on the content of the import file whether and how the operation proceeds A file will be imported only if the basic units from the file match the Y Source setting or if the unit is allowed in the graphic subsystem For ex...

Page 628: ...sts from the R S UPL can still be used Sweep lists from the R S UPL have different file name extensions SPF for frequency values in Hz SPV for level values in V or FS SPO for on time values in s SPI for interval values in s DWL for dwell time values in s From these file name extensions the R S UPP recognizes whether the loading pro cedure is allowed It is therefore recommended that the file name e...

Page 629: ... fields These explanations are not stored in the trace file Green Fixed entries in ASCII format to facilitate assignment of the following data Red Entries which change These entries are depending on the graphic system and the settings in the corresponding DispConfig panel FILE Not a fixed value but a trace Can occur in the case of Limit and Reference VOID No value present because the trace is turn...

Page 630: ...Instrument Functions R S UPP 614 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 Format ...

Page 631: ...Instrument Functions R S UPP 615 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 Format ...

Page 632: ... Trace B Frequency FFT Level Ch1 FFT Level Ch2 Frequency Hz FFT Level Ch1 dBV FFT Level Ch2 V Hz dBV V LIN LIN LIN 0 170 0 22000 10 1 VOID VOID VOID VOID VOID VOID Scan 0 Labeltext Labeltext Hz V V 1000 1 00e 000 1 00e 000 A X 256 A Y A LimLow A LimUpp A RefY in dBV B X 256 B Y B LimLow B LimUpp BRefY in dBV 0 00e 000 1 08e 002 VOID VOID 1 00e 000 VOID VOID VOID VOID VOID 9 37e 001 9 93e 001 VOID ...

Page 633: ...n plain text in ASCII format The format has been selected so that the data can be processed without a problem in EXCEL Structure of the equalization file The individual parameters are TAB separated Black Explanation of fields These explanations are not stored in the equalization file Green Fixed entries in ASCII format Red Entries which change depending on the settings in the corresponding DispCon...

Page 634: ... V Norm value 100 000000000000 4891 695800781250 103 072242736816 4622 376953125000 106 238868713379 4368 537597656250 1027 808593750000 1 006141066551 1940 386596679688 2496 481933593750 2000 000000000000 4583 853027343750 If a data set is subsequently edited manually comment lines which can be identified by a at the beginning of the line can be inserted at any position ahead of the X Y pairs A d...

Page 635: ...this file with regard to the current setting If for example an attempt was made to load a sweep list with the basic unit Hz for a voltage list sweep such a file would be ignored X values X values for a list sweep Example of a sweep list data set UPV SWEEPLIST FILE 9 Datacount Hz Basic unit 16 000000000000 20 000000000000 25 000000000000 31 500000000000 40 000000000000 50 000000000000 63 0000000000...

Page 636: ...es whether during the generation of a limit file from a measured value sequence an offset value was added ON or not OFF to the Y data Offset value A comment which states which offset value was added to the Y data during the generation of a limit file from a measured value sequence X and Y unit Depending on the selected x axis and the measurement function a wide variety of units can be entered here...

Page 637: ... of this description The examples are really intended for the trained user Example The intention is to generate a tolerance band from the frequency response of an ideal DUT This tolerance band will be compared to the other DUTs The measured value sequence of this ideal DUT is generated by means of a 30 point sweep Using Store Trace as Limit List a limit file with 30 pairs of X Y values is generate...

Page 638: ...dpass display This makes it necessary to modify the limit file For this purpose the file named LH_30_up lim is loaded into an ASCII editor such as the Windows Editor which is present as an accessory on every Windows operating system for the R S UPP The editor displays a data set as shown in the left column above This data set is then modified as shown in the right column The modified data record i...

Page 639: ...le for the lower limit of a tolerance band can be generated in much the same way as the procedure for modifying a limit file for the upper limit of a tolerance band The two limit files together produce the desired tolerance band Example The intention is to create a sweep file from the trace data set of a waveform file Leave to one side the matter of whether this serves any purpose The example is i...

Page 640: ...Instrument Functions R S UPP 624 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 The data sets are displayed in abbreviated form Explanation of the changes Editing ...

Page 641: ...cessory on every Windows operating system for the R S UPP The editor displays a data set as shown in the left column above This data set is then modified as shown in the right column The amended data set is saved with another name e g myswp trc After the new data set is loaded in the Sweep graphic system a trace identical to that of the waveform must be seen though its x axis will be totally diffe...

Page 642: ...quisite that Microsoft Excel is installed on the R S UPP or that a PC is available on which Excel is already installed If a PC is to be used the trace file being exported must be copied to this PC by means of a USB stick for example The PC must be changed over to the English language option if this has not already been done This is usually not necessary in the case of the R S UPP since the R S UPP...

Page 643: ...iles are generated within the R S UPP exclusively in the English number format decimal point rather than decimal comma and can there fore be processed in Excel without the slightest need for post processing Reading the trace file into Excel Open Excel and open the file selector via the menu item File Open Go to the directory containing the trace file that is to be exported In the File name field t...

Page 644: ... opens in which no changes must be made if Start Control Panel Regional and Language Options is set to the condition as supplied to the customer English United Kingdom Finish The trace files have been designed by R S so that without a single entry the data set appears in Excel and can be processed further Export ...

Page 645: ... is defined by the extension The Windows file selection box is split into three areas On the left is a selection bar of icons which can be used to jump to different drives and personal directories In the upper area are the navigation buttons for such things as changing directories or creating new directories Directly below is a list of the displayed files In the lower area is the entry field for t...

Page 646: ...ings of the instrument with the settings that were active when setup was saved Depending on the type of setup to be loaded only the current settings are overwritten current setup or the entire settings including the position and size of all windows in all screens complete setup Remote control command MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 832 5 59 Printing and Saving 5 59 1 Printing and Saving Display Screen ...

Page 647: ...he Graphic Profiles In addition the size of the graphic can be set 5 59 2 Configuring Print and Save Operations The menu Utilities Config Panel section Printer opens a configuration panel for defining the required output parameters See Source on page 494 5 59 3 Starting Print and Save Operations HCOPY HCOPY triggers the function for output of the measurement results The desired action is executed ...

Page 648: ...tore the default settings e g for the screen display you just need to load an empty gpf file or default gpf file A number of predefined examples can be found in C UPV Config User Profiles or in D UPV User Profiles Remote command SYSTem PROFile CLIPboard on page 846 SYSTem PROFile FILE on page 846 SYSTem PROFile PRINter on page 847 SYSTem PROFile SCReen on page 847 5 59 4 2 Editing Graphic Profile ...

Page 649: ...l 1411 1055 32 10 If the message appears none of the graphical windows has the focus Clicking opens a drop down menu that can be used to create a new profile file load an existing profile file or save the current profile file Printing and Saving ...

Page 650: ...er Manual 1411 1055 32 10 If an existing graphic profile file is loaded its properties are displayed in the Profile Edi tor A very colorful example The following example would be more suitable for output on a printer Printing and Saving ...

Page 651: ...Instrument Functions R S UPP 635 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 Select the property which is to be changed Color opens Printing and Saving ...

Page 652: ...ace and scan must be selected With Scan 0 the property is set for the current curve Other scan values are only used for functions where multiple curves from repeated measurements are saved temporarily The numeric value for thickness must be confirmed with ENTER If you press OK in the Profile Editor before the current settings have been saved a query appears asking whether you want to save these se...

Page 653: ... 637 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 A number of predefined gpf files can be created for various applications 5 59 4 3 Print Preview opens with the settings of the printer file which is selected in the Config Panel Printing and Saving ...

Page 654: ...USB A controller can be connected on the remote control interfaces either direct via IEC bus USB interface or through a network LAN The connectors are located on the rear panel of the instrument Remote control via IEC IEEE bus and USB interface are identical concerning the requirements The differences to remote control via LAN are minor they will be descri bed in greater detail below If remote con...

Page 655: ... and then make the required settings 6 2 Brief Instructions The following short and simple operating sequence allows rapid setup of the instru ment on the IEC IEEE bus and setting of its basic functions It is assumed that the IEC IEEE bus address factory set to 20 has not yet been altered Interconnect the instrument and the controller by the IEC IEEE bus cable and power them on Connect generator o...

Page 656: ...ing remote control with the parameter field SCPI Update see also SCPI update on page 494 In the middle of the screen you see the message Remote Operation Active On the front panel the LED labeled REM illuminates over the Standby key Messages appearing during remote control are shown in the status line over the soft keys The instrument remains in the REMOTE status until local control is selected ei...

Page 657: ...ler and the instrument must be con nected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network protocol Connection of the R S UPP to a network and querying of the computer name is explained in Chapter 2 10 Connect R S UPP to a Network LAN on page 45 R S UPP is supplied with an activated Windows firewall already installed In contrast to file transfer via a LAN or manual remote operation wi...

Page 658: ...at can access a computer via the network Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be installed on the controller Instrument control is by the VXI 11 standard protocol Only the IP address or the computer name is required for connection setup The IP address computer name is part of the resource name used by programs to identify and control the instrument The resource name ha...

Page 659: ...nstrument has its own IP address and associated resource name The controller distinguishes these instruments by their resource name In the example below the Measurement Automation Explorer program from National Instruments is used to set up an Ethernet remote control connection Connection setup with this program is simple and first tests can be performed R S UPP is ready config ured for networks u...

Page 660: ...r name can also be checked For further troubleshooting it is advisable to inform the network adminis trator Large networks require specification of additional addresses for connection setup e g gateway and subnet mask which are known to the network administra tor Press the Next button In the next window you can enter an alias for the instru ment This name must not be mistaken for the computer name...

Page 661: ... addressed by the resource name or alias Starting the Measurement Automation Control program for remote control of the R S UPP Launch the program on the control computer Open panel Configuration Instruments and Interfaces and select under VISA Ethernet Devices Instrument R S UPP Alias Open the Open VISA Session menu with the right mouse key Changing to Remote Control ...

Page 662: ...us the control computer and the instrument must be connected by a USB cable A program for controlling instruments such as the VISA program library with USB support Version 3 4 or later must be installed in the control computer The instrument is controlled via the standardized USB protocol The only information necessary for establishing a link is the USB Vendor ID of Rohde Schwarz 0x0AAD the Class ...

Page 663: ... thus its own associated resource name The controller distinguishes these instruments by their resource name The National Instruments Measurement Automation Explorer program is used in the following example of USB remote control setup This program makes it easy to establish a connection and get started with testing Configuring the control of R S UPP in the Measurement Automation Control pro gram L...

Page 664: ... be displayed here 6 4 Messages The messages transmitted on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus or on a TCP IP net work can be divided into two groups Interface messages Device dependent messages 6 4 1 Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is active They are used for communication between the controller and Messages ...

Page 665: ...ice dependent messages are transmitted on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is not active ASCII code is used for data transmission If an Ethernet connection is present signaling on a hardware control line is not required Device dependent messages are identical for the two interfaces IEC IEEE bus and Ethernet They are differentiated by the direction in which they are sent...

Page 666: ...in the following section 6 5 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Commands consist of a header and usually one or more parameters The header and parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g space Headers may be composed of several keywords Queries are formed by add ing a question mark direct to the header The commands used in the following examples are not implemen...

Page 667: ...h has to be stated This starts left with the highest level and the individual keywords are separated by a colon Example SOURce VOLTage OFFSet STATe ON This command is on the fourth level of the SOURce system It sets the DC offset of the generator signal Figure 6 1 Tree structure of SCPI command systems taking SOURce system as example extract SCPI Command Structure and Syntax ...

Page 668: ...ckets For rea sons of compatibility with the SCPI standard the device must be able to recognize the full length of the command Some commands become considerably shorter when the optional keywords are omitted Example INSTrument 1 SELect ANLG DIG This command sets the generator to analog or digital signal generation INSTrument 1 SELect ANLG DIG means that the command can be sent to the instrument in...

Page 669: ... counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is stated 6 5 1 Structure of a Program Message A program message can contain one or more commands It is terminated by a New Line ASCII code 10 decimal or EOI EOI line active together with the last useful character of the program message Seeing as the Carriage Return character ASCII code 13 decimal has no effect ...

Page 670: ... MAX Response 48 KHZ 30 KHZ 200 KHZ 2 Measurement Results Example SENSe DATA SENSe DATA MIN SENSe DATA MAX Response 82 341 DBFS 101 695 DBFS 19 979 DBFS 3 Strings are returned in single quotation marks Extension with MIN AND MAX is not permissible Example MMEMory SWEep STORe Response MYTRACE TRC 4 Text parameters character data are returned in short form Extension with MIN AND MAX is not permissib...

Page 671: ...yzer the internal R S UPP the internal setting routine is not performed This behavior increases the speed of the IEC bus control program Example Setting command SOURce SWEep CONTrol ASWeep Query SOURce SWEep CONTrol Response ASWorASWeep Strings Character strings must always be entered between single or double quotation marks Filenames also count as strings Normally however single quotation marks a...

Page 672: ...nd Processing The device model shown in the following figure was created from the point of view of processing SCPI commands The individual components operate independently of each other and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of mes sages Device Model and Command Processing ...

Page 673: ...trans fer is halted and the data received until then are processed Then the IEC IEEE bus or Ethernet transfer is continued If the buffer is not yet full when the end character is received however the input unit can receive the next command while the previous command is parsed and executed Reception of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately triggers a message to the parser 6 6 2 Parser Analy...

Page 674: ...red to the database of the R S UPP and the device hard ware is set If existing settings show that the command is illegal it is rejected an exe cution error is sent to the status reporting system and the device hardware is not set for this command Subsequent commands that are admissible on the basis of the exist ing settings are executed see following section This strictly hierarchic procedure ensu...

Page 675: ... to set the parameters each time on the IEC IEEE bus If the R S UPP did not have this ability the user could overwrite parameters for instruments that are not active and the parameters of the function last used would no longer be available Since manual and remote control work with the same internal data sets and a mixture of manual and remote control must be possible only one uniform method of int...

Page 676: ...ate the three trigger possibilities together with singly triggered measurement results command synchronization with WAI is used in what follows 6 6 8 Command Synchronization To ensure that commands are executed in a certain sequence one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI must be used As a result of these commands a certain action is not triggered until the hardware is set and settled The controller ca...

Page 677: ...mea surement or the first sweep cycle has been completed Generator and analyzer configuration commands immediately trig ger a restart of the continuous measurement INIT CONT OFF without WAI When a generator or analyzer setting command is sent during a sin gle measurement i e before the measurement is completed the measurement is restarted to avoid incorrect results incorrect results could be obtai...

Page 678: ...arameters when querying parameters Remote control command SYSTem QLONg ON OFF Example If the analog generator has been set to Output Type Bal the query OUTPut TYPE returns BAL in the short form and BALanced in the long form 6 7 1 Starting Recording Open the window through the Menu by Sequence SCPI Recording 6 7 2 Recording Commands As long as the SCPI Recording window is opened almost all settings...

Page 679: ...ut errors that occur red This information is stored in the status registers and the error queue The contents of status registers and the error queue can be queried on the IEC IEEE bus or via the LAN or USB interface Information is hierarchically structured The highest level is formed by the Status Byte STB register defined in IEEE 488 2 and the associated Service Request Enable SRE register The ST...

Page 680: ... for all five parts For instance bit 5 of the STA Tus OPERation register is assigned to the Wait for Trigger hardware status in all five parts Figure 6 3 General structure of the status registers Queries return the current value of the particular part register to allow a check of the device status A decimal value between 0 and 32767 2 15 1 or between 0 and 65535 2 16 1 is returned The configuratio...

Page 681: ...gh the transition filters The EVENt part is continuously updated by the device This part is read only Reading clears its contents This part is often equated with the overall register ENABle The ENABle determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the total bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed to the corresponding ENABle bit symbol The results of all logical operations of ...

Page 682: ...Remote Control Fundamentals R S UPP 666 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 6 8 2 Overview of Status Registers Figure 6 4 Overview of Status Registers Status Reporting System ...

Page 683: ...y the controller The SRE can be set with the SRE command and read out with SRE Reading the EVENt deletes the associated bit in the status byte register e g STAT OPER EVEN deletes the OPER bit d7 in the OPERation register Table 6 3 Meaning of bits in status byte Bit no Meaning 7 OPERation status register summary bit This bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the ass...

Page 684: ... be read by the queries STATus XQUEstionable CONDition or STATus XQUEstionable EVENt 0 Not used 6 8 4 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable PPE Register Similar to the SRQ the IST flag combines the complete status information in a single bit It can be queried by a parallel poll see Chapter 6 8 12 3 Parallel Poll on page 678 The parallel poll enable PPE register determines which bits of the STB contrib...

Page 685: ...quested data 1 Not used 0 Operation complete When the OPC command is received this bit is set if all previous commands have been executed 6 8 6 STATus OPERation Register The CONDition register contains information on the operations currently being per formed by the device while the EVENt register contains information on the operations performed by the device since the last readout of the register ...

Page 686: ...inuous sweep is being performed 1 1 1 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Waiting for trigger This bit is set as long as the R S UPP is waiting for a trigger event Example The generator outputs a sine burst signal with a Burst on Delay of 2 s As trigger condition for the analyzer a Lev Trig is set under Start Cond For a period of 2 s i e as long as the trigger condition is not met this bit is set Onc...

Page 687: ...bout questionable device statuses These may occur when the device is operated beyond its specifications It can be read by the queries STATus QUEStionable CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EVENt Reading the EVENt part deletes its content Bit no Meaning 15 Not used 14 Not used 13 Not used 12 11 10 Generator status Bit 12 11 10 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 1 Generator Off Both generator channels are off 0 1 0 G...

Page 688: ... Summary of multichannel MEASuring for multichannel operation Summary bit for the lower order STATus QUEStionable MEASuring register which returns the activated channels during multichannel operation 6 8 8 STATus QUEStionable UNDERrange Register This register only contains underrange information concerning the individual channels of multichannel operation It can be read by the query STATus QUEStio...

Page 689: ...EStionable OVERrange CONDition or STATus QUEStionable OVERrange EVENt Reading the EVENt part deletes its content Table 6 7 Meaning of bits in STATus QUEStionable OVERrange register Bit No Meaning 15 Slave 8 For cascading signals with a 1 which slave has identified an overrange 14 Slave 7 13 Slave 6 12 Slave 5 11 Slave 4 10 Slave 3 9 Slave 2 8 Slave 1 7 Ch8 0 The channel in question is not overrang...

Page 690: ... STATus QUEStionable MEASuring Register Bit No Meaning 15 Slave 8 For cascading signals with a 1 which slave has identified a change of the channel setting 14 Slave 7 13 Slave 6 12 Slave 5 11 Slave 4 10 Slave 3 9 Slave 2 8 Slave 1 7 Ch8 Returns the setting of channels of multichannel operation in the Analyzer Config panel 0 The channel in question is deactivated 1 The channel in question is activa...

Page 691: ... 9 Not used 8 Not used 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Not used 4 Not used 3 Not used 2 Not used 1 Not used 0 Not used If a multichannel analyzer is switched on the bits 0 5 are deleted 6 8 12 Use of Status Reporting System For efficient use of the status reporting system the information it contains has to be transferred to the controller and further processed There are various methods which are described...

Page 692: ...uest is triggered in case of mal functions The program should respond accordingly to the service request 6 8 12 2 Serial Poll Serial poll is mainly used for a fast overview of the status of several devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus or LAN USB Like the STB command the serial poll is used to query the status byte of a device Querying is implemented by interface messages however making it much fa...

Page 693: ...nstrument Call ibconfig 0 IbcAUTOPOLL 1 enable auto serial polling Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 set END bit on EOS match during read Call ibconfig 0 IbcEOScmp 0 7 bit EOS char Call ibconfig 0 IbcEOSrd 1 terminate read by EOS char Call ibconfig 0 IbcEOSchar 10 EOS character LF as terminator Call ibclr UPV device clear Call ibwrt UPV IDN ask for instrument identity Call ibrd UPV Response read...

Page 694: ... result is then sent possibly inverted to the controller as a response to a parallel poll The result can also be read without a parallel poll by the command IST The device must first be set for parallel poll by the Visual Basic command IBPPC This command assigns the device a data line and specifies whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is performed with IBRPP The parallel...

Page 695: ...or queue should be queried at regular intervals since it also registers faulty commands from the control ler to the device 6 8 13 Initializing the Status Reporting System Commands RST SYSTem PRESet DCL and SDC do not affect the status reporting system Commands RST and SYSTem PRESet affect the instrument settings Table 6 9 Resetting device functions Event DCL Device Clear SDC Selected Devi ceClear ...

Page 696: ...nual settings thus allow ing remote control commands to be assigned to the parameter fields in the panels Since the panels do not provide for any settings relating to the triggering of measure ments or reading of results these functions are not recorded This chapter lists all commands The sequence follows closly the sequence of the description of the manual settings in Chapter 5 Instrument Functio...

Page 697: ...kets 1 4 n i and are replaced by a single value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 Example Definition DATA BARGraph Y ch Command DATA BARG Y2 This command reads out the Y axis value of channel 2 Optional mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the d...

Page 698: ...t of parameters The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Allowed parameters are Numeric values Special numeric values Boolean parameters Text Character strings Block data The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description 7 1 1 1 Numeric values Numeric values can be ...

Page 699: ...es They denote the minimum and maximum value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command They must be entered following the quota tion mark see also Chapter 6 5 2 Responses to Queries on page 653 Example Setting command SOUR VOLT MAX Query SOUR VOLT MAX Response maximum numeric value 7 1 1 4 Boolean Parameters Boolean paramet...

Page 700: ...s must always be entered in quotation marks or Example Definition MMEMory LOAD FREQuency file Setting command MMEMory LOAD FREQuency Test1 or MMEMory LOAD FREQuency Test1 7 2 Common Commands The common commands are taken from the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard Some commands have the same effect on different devices The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many ...

Page 701: ...en use command CLS to clear the ESR Event status register e g in case of an aborted synchronization ESE Value EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the value indicated The query form ESE returns the contents of the event status enable register in deci mal form Parameters Value 0 to 255 ESR Value STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the contents of the event status register in...

Page 702: ...the event status register after all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request see also Chapter 6 6 Device Model and Command Processing on page 656 OPC OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY returns a 1 when all previous commands have been processed It is important that the timeout set on the IEC IEEE bus is sufficiently long OPT Options OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY ...

Page 703: ...mmand clears the Enable and NTRansition parts of the Operation and Questionable registers and fills the PTRansition part with 1 In order to start a remote control program with a defined initial device status use com mand RST or SYSTem PRESet to preset the instrument Then use command CLS to clear the ESR Event status register e g in case of an aborted synchronization SRE Value SERVICE REQUEST ENABL...

Page 704: ...ng the Generator The generator type is selected with the INSTrument command INSTrument n1 generator_type This command selects the generator or analyzer The active selection is determined by suffix n1 at INSTrument Suffix n1 1 2 Suffix 1 or no suffix at INSTrument defines that selection of the generator is active Suffix 2 at INSTrument defines that selection of the analyzer is active see Chapter 7 ...

Page 705: ...operation See Ref Frequency on page 199 See Ref Frequency on page 210 See Ref Frequency on page 218 See Ref Frequency on page 229 SOURce VOLTage REFerence reference Parameters reference float Manual operation See Ref Voltage on page 199 See Ref Voltage on page 210 See Ref Voltage on page 217 See Ref Voltage on page 229 7 3 2 2 Configuring the Analog Generator OUTPut BANDwidth MODE on page 689 OUTP...

Page 706: ...e Impedance on page 198 OUTPut IMPedance UNBalanced Return values impedance R25 R600 Usage Query only Manual operation See Impedance on page 198 OUTPut TYPE type Parameters type BALanced UNBalanced Manual operation See Output Type on page 197 SOURce VOLTage MAXimum maximum Parameters maximum float Manual operation See Max Voltage on page 199 SOURce VOLTage RANGe range Parameters range AUTO FIXed M...

Page 707: ...See Audio Bits on page 214 See Audio Bits on page 228 OUTPut SAMPle MODE mode Parameters mode Digital and HDMI generator F32 F44 F48 F88 F96 F176 F192 VALue I2S generator F08 F11 F16 F22 F32 F44 F48 F88 F96 F176 F192 VALue Manual operation See Sample Frequency on page 208 See Sample Freq on page 214 See Sample Freq on page 228 OUTPut SIGNal BALanced LEVel level Parameters level float Manual operat...

Page 708: ...ion See Sync To on page 206 See Sync To on page 213 See Sync To on page 227 7 3 2 4 Configuring the I2S Generator OUTPut AUDiobits on page 691 OUTPut BCLK FREQuency on page 692 OUTPut CHANnel on page 690 OUTPut FBIT on page 693 OUTPut FORMat on page 693 OUTPut FSHape on page 693 OUTPut FSYNc FREQuency on page 693 OUTPut MCHannels n2 on page 693 OUTPut MCLKratio on page 694 OUTPut POLarity on page ...

Page 709: ... page 217 OUTPut FSYNc FREQuency Return values argument float Usage Query only Manual operation See MClk Freq on page 215 OUTPut MCHannels n2 mchannels Suffix n2 1 to 10 n2 1 to 8 when option R S UPP B4 is implemented and the I2S generator is selected or when the HDMI generator with audio format PCM 8 Ch Layer 1 is selected n2 3 to 10 when option R S UPP B8 is implemented and the analog or digital...

Page 710: ...See Sample Frequency on page 208 See Sample Freq on page 214 See Sample Freq Value on page 229 OUTPut WLENgth wlength Parameters wlength W16 W24 W32 Manual operation See Word Length on page 214 OUTPut WOFFset woffset Parameters woffset integer Manual operation See Word Offset on page 217 7 3 2 5 Configure HDMI Generator OUTPut CHANnel on page 690 OUTPut MCHannels n2 on page 693 OUTPut RESYnc on pa...

Page 711: ...E EXEC Manual operation See Hotplug detect on page 229 SOURce HDMI AUDio FORMat format Parameters format PCM2ch PCM8ch DBD DBDP Manual operation See Audio Format on page 226 SOURce HDMI SARC sarc Parameters sarc LOOPback DAGen Manual operation See Sink ARC on page 209 SOURce HDMI VIDeo COLor DEPTh depth Parameters depth D08 D10 D12 Manual operation See Color Depth on page 225 SOURce HDMI VIDeo CON...

Page 712: ... on page 223 SOURce HDMI VIDeo SOURce source Parameters source INTern AXINput Manual operation See Source on page 223 7 3 3 Generator Signals The generator signals are defined in the SOURce subsystem The type of generator signal is selected wirth command SOURce FUNCtion SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 7 3 3 1 Sine MMEMory LOAD OEQualize on page 697 SOURce FILTer on page 776 SOURce FREQuency n2 on page...

Page 713: ...pper frequency and suffix 2 the lower frequency For Modulation suffix 1 or no suffix selects the modulation fre quency and suffix 2 the carrier frequency For all other generator signals the suffix is irrelevant and must be omitted or set to 1 Parameters frequency float Manual operation See Frequency on page 234 See Frequency on page 236 See Freq Ch1 on page 237 See Freq No i on page 241 See Freque...

Page 714: ...ion on page 269 See Function on page 278 SOURce SIGChange sigchange Parameters sigchange ON OFF Manual operation See Signal change at zero crossing on page 234 See Signal change at zero crossing on page 237 SOURce SINusoid DITHer dither Parameters dither float Manual operation See Dither on page 233 See Dither on page 235 See Dither on page 245 See Dither on page 248 See Dither on page 269 SOURce ...

Page 715: ...page 237 See Volt No i on page 241 See Voltage on page 243 See Volt Peak Ch1 on page 261 See Total RMS on page 263 See Voltage on page 278 SOURce VOLTage EQUalize equalize Parameters equalize ON OFF Manual operation See Equalizer Equalizer Ch1 on page 238 See Equalizer on page 244 See Equalizer on page 249 See Equalizer on page 254 See Equalizer on page 272 See Equalizer on page 279 SOURce VOLTage...

Page 716: ... all other generator functions and can be omitted Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See DC Offset on page 235 See DC Offset on page 239 See Offset Ch2 on page 239 See DC Offset on page 242 See DC Offset on page 244 See DC Offset on page 246 See DC Offset on page 249 See DC Offset on page 254 See DC Offset on page 256 See DC Offset on page 263 See DC Offset on page 267 7 3 3 2 Stereo Sine MM...

Page 717: ...700 SOURce VOLTage RATio on page 702 SOURce VOLTage SELect on page 703 SOURce VOLTage STEReo n3 EQUalize on page 703 MMEMory LOAD STEReo n3 OEQualize oequalize Suffix n3 1 2 Stereo channel 1 or 2 Parameters oequalize string Manual operation See Equalizer Ch2 on page 239 SOURce FILTer CHANnels channels Parameters channels TRACk SPLit Manual operation See Filter on page 238 See Filter on page 262 SO...

Page 718: ... page 237 See Volt Peak Ch2 on page 261 SOURce VOLTage EQUalize CHANnels channels Parameters channels TRACk SPLit Manual operation See Equalizer on page 238 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 CHANnels channels Suffix n3 1 2 The suffix is only relevant for generator function Stereo Sine It selects the channel 1 or 2 for which the offset is entered The suffix is irrelevant for all other generator functions an...

Page 719: ...OURce FUNCtion on page 697 SOURce FUNCtion MODE on page 703 SOURce MULTisine COUNt on page 704 SOURce PHASe n2 on page 702 SOURce RANDom SPACing FREQuency on page 704 SOURce RANDom SPACing MODE on page 704 SOURce VOLTage n2 on page 699 SOURce VOLTage CREStfactor MODE on page 704 SOURce VOLTage EQUalize on page 699 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 on page 699 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 STATe on page 700 SOUR...

Page 720: ...ng on page 252 SOURce RANDom SPACing MODE mode Parameters mode ATRack USERdefined Manual operation See Spacing on page 240 See Spacing on page 252 SOURce VOLTage CREStfactor MODE mode Parameters mode MINimized DPHase Manual operation See Crest Factor on page 240 SOURce VOLTage RMS rms Parameters rms float Manual operation See Total RMS on page 241 See Volt RMS on page 254 See Volt RMS on page 256 ...

Page 721: ... Sine Burst MMEMory LOAD OEQualize on page 697 SOURce FILTer on page 776 SOURce FREQuency n2 on page 697 SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 SOURce INTerval on page 705 SOURce ONTime on page 705 SOURce ONTime DELay on page 706 SOURce VOLTage n2 on page 699 SOURce VOLTage EQUalize on page 699 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 on page 699 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 STATe on page 700 SOURce INTerval interval Parameters...

Page 722: ...age 700 SOURce VOLTage RATio on page 702 SOURce VOLTage TOTal on page 704 7 3 3 6 DFD MMEMory LOAD OEQualize on page 697 SOURce FILTer on page 776 SOURce FREQuency n2 on page 697 SOURce FREQuency DIFFerence on page 706 SOURce FREQuency MEAN on page 707 SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 SOURce FUNCtion MODE on page 703 SOURce SINusoid DITHer on page 698 SOURce SINusoid DITHer STATe on page 698 SOURce VOL...

Page 723: ... on page 707 SOURce RANDom SHAPe on page 707 SOURce RANDom SPACing FREQuency on page 704 SOURce RANDom SPACing MODE on page 704 SOURce VOLTage EQUalize on page 699 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 on page 699 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 STATe on page 700 SOURce VOLTage RMS on page 704 SOURce VOLTage TOTal on page 704 SOURce RANDom FREQuency LOWer lower Parameters lower float Manual operation See Lower Freq o...

Page 724: ...e File on page 257 7 3 3 9 Play Playing waveforms requires option R S UPP B6 MMEMory LOAD ARBitrary on page 708 SOURce FILTer on page 776 SOURce FILTer CHANnels on page 701 SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 SOURce PLAY CHANnel on page 708 SOURce PLAY MODE on page 709 SOURce PLAY MUTing on page 709 SOURce PLAY RESTart on page 709 SOURce PLAY SCALepktofs on page 709 SOURce PLAY TIME on page 709 SOURce VOL...

Page 725: ...URce PLAY RESTart state Parameters state OFF AUTO ONCE Manual operation See Restart on page 259 See Restart on page 271 SOURce PLAY SCALepktofs scalepktofs Parameters scalepktofs ON OFF Manual operation See Scale Pk to FS on page 258 SOURce PLAY TIME time Parameters time float Manual operation See Time on page 260 7 3 3 10 Polarity SOURce FREQuency n2 on page 697 SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 SOURce...

Page 726: ...e MCHannel n2 FILTer on page 776 SOURce MCHannel n2 GAIN on page 713 SOURce MCHannel n2 LIMittofs on page 713 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE ARBitrary DELay on page 713 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE ARBitrary STATe on page 713 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE ARBitrary VOLTage on page 713 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE EQUalize STATe on page 713 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE FREQuency on page 714 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE OFFSet STAT...

Page 727: ...ename Manual operation See Arbitrary on page 275 MMEMory LOAD MCHannel n3 SINE EQUalize equalize Suffix n3 1 10 n3 1 to 8 either when option R S UPP B4 is implemented and the I2S generator is selected or when the HDMI generator with audio format PCM 8 Ch Layer 1 is selected n3 3 to 10 when option R S UPP B8 is implemented and the analog or digital audio generator is selected Parameters equalize st...

Page 728: ... time float Manual operation See Time on page 275 SOURce LIPSync PATTern AUDioactive COLor STRing string Parameters string string SOURce LIPSync PATTern MUTE COLor STRing string Parameters string string SOURce MCHannel n2 ACHSine STATe state Suffix n2 1 to 10 Note The following description of the suffix is valid for all SOURce MCHannel commands n2 1 to 8 when option UPP B4 is implemented and the I...

Page 729: ...meters limittofs ON OFF Manual operation See Limit to Max on page 276 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE ARBitrary DELay delay Parameters delay float Manual operation See Delay on page 275 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE ARBitrary STATe state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Arbitrary on page 275 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE ARBitrary VOLTage voltage Parameters voltage float Manual operation See Arbitrary on ...

Page 730: ... SINE OFFSet VOLTage voltage Parameters voltage float Manual operation See DC Offset on page 274 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE PHASe phase Parameters phase float Manual operation See Phase on page 274 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE STATe state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Sine on page 273 SOURce MCHannel n2 SINE VOLTage voltage Parameters voltage float Manual operation See Voltage on page 274 S...

Page 731: ... in any case oOption R S UPP K21 Digital audio protocol see Chapter 5 8 Protocol Generator on page 280 SOURce PROTocol AZERo on page 715 SOURce PROTocol CH n3 BYTE n4 on page 715 SOURce PROTocol CRC on page 716 SOURce PROTocol FILE on page 716 SOURce PROTocol MODE on page 716 SOURce PROTocol NUMerical BYTE on page 716 SOURce PROTocol NUMerical CH on page 716 SOURce PROTocol NUMerical VALue on page...

Page 732: ...eters crc ON OFF Manual operation See CRC on page 282 SOURce PROTocol FILE file Parameters file file name Manual operation See Channel Status File on page 282 SOURce PROTocol MODE mode Parameters mode AUTomatic AUTOmatic CONSumer PROFessional FILE Manual operation See Coding Mode on page 281 SOURce PROTocol NUMerical BYTE byte Parameters byte integer Manual operation See Byte Number on page 283 SO...

Page 733: ...Quency HALT VALue on page 719 SOURce SWEep FREQuency POINts on page 719 SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing on page 719 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STARt on page 719 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP on page 719 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STOP on page 719 SOURce SWEep NEXTstep on page 718 SOURce SWEep PHASe HALT on page 718 SOURce SWEep PHASe HALT VALue on page 719 SOURce SWEep PHASe POINts on page 719 SOURce SWEep P...

Page 734: ... See Tot Volt File Volt File on page 296 SOURce SWEep CONTrol control Parameters control OFF ASWeep ALISt Manual operation See Sweep Ctrl on page 245 See Sweep Ctrl on page 248 See Sweep Ctrl on page 264 See Sweep Ctrl on page 271 See Sweep Ctrl on page 287 SOURce SWEep DWELl dwell Parameters dwell float Manual operation See Next Step on page 291 SOURce SWEep NEXTstep nextstep Parameters nextstep ...

Page 735: ... 294 SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing spacing SOURce SWEep PHASe SPACing spacing SOURce SWEep VOLTage SPACing spacing Parameters spacing LINSteps LOGSteps LINPoints LOGPoints Manual operation See Spacing on page 293 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STARt start SOURce SWEep PHASe STARt start SOURce SWEep VOLTage STARt start Parameters start float Manual operation See Start on page 294 SOURce SWEep FREQuency ST...

Page 736: ...function OUTPut output Parameters output ON OFF 7 4 Analyzer Settings The commands for selecting and setting the analyzer are described in the following sequence 1 Selection of Analyzer 2 Setting the various analyzer types How to start and configure are measurement is described in the following chapters For rapid deactivation of outputs see Chapter 7 3 6 Rapid Deactivation of Outputs on page 720 7...

Page 737: ...tion See Instrument on page 301 7 4 2 Configuring the Analog Analyzer The settings for the analog Analyzer are performed in the INPut SENSe and TRIGger subsystems INPut 1 BANDwidth MODE on page 722 INPut n1 COUPling on page 722 INPut 1 COUPling CHANnels on page 722 INPut 1 FILTer on page 773 INPut 1 MCHannels n2 on page 722 INPut MIMPedance n2 on page 722 INPut MIMPedance CHANnels on page 723 INPu...

Page 738: ...annels TRACk SPLit Manual operation See AC DC Coupling on page 304 INPut 1 MCHannels n2 mchannels Suffix n2 selects the measurement channel 1 to 8 Parameters mchannels ON OFF Manual operation See Meas Channels on page 304 See Meas Channels on page 317 See Meas Channel on page 330 INPut MIMPedance n2 mimpedance Suffix n2 1 to 8 n2 1 for setting INPut MIMPedance CHANnels TRACk n2 1 to 8 for setting ...

Page 739: ... page 310 See Max FFT Size on page 314 See Max FFT Size on page 320 See Max FFT Size on page 334 SENSe 1 POWer REFerence RESistance resistance Parameters resistance float Manual operation See Ref Imped on page 308 SENSe 1 REFerence CHANnel channel Parameters channel CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 Manual operation See Ref Channel on page 309 See Ref Channel on page 332 See Ref Channel on page 342 ...

Page 740: ...lue 12 V 3 3 13 19999 V value 50 V 13 2 55 00 V The query response to this command returns the range nominal value in Volts e g SENSe VOLTage RANGe2 VALue Response 0 8 for the range 800 mV RMS Any voltage value can be specified instead of the range nominal value to specifically set the respective measurement range This range is shown in brackets 7 4 3 Configuring the Digital Analyzer The settings ...

Page 741: ...ion See Channel on page 312 See Channel on page 316 See Channel on page 330 INPut 1 SAMPle FREQuency frequency Parameters frequency float Manual operation See Sample Freq on page 312 See Sample Freq on page 317 See Sample Freq on page 331 INPut 1 SAMPle FREQuency MODE mode Parameters mode digital and HDMI analyzer F32 F44 F48 F88 F96 F176 F192 VALue AUTO I2S analyzer F08 F11 F16 F22 F32 F44 F48 F8...

Page 742: ... page 726 INPut 1 INPut on page 727 INPut 1 SAMPle FREQuency on page 725 INPut 1 SAMPle FREQuency MODE on page 725 INPut n1 WLENgth on page 727 INPut n1 WOFFset on page 727 SENSe 1 MAX FFT SIZE on page 723 INPut 1 BCLK FREQuency Return values frequency integer Usage Query only Manual operation See BClk Freq on page 318 INPut 1 FBIT fbit Parameters fbit MSB LSB Manual operation See First Bit on pag...

Page 743: ... the HDMI Analyzer are performed in the INPut SENSe and TRIGger subsystems INPut 1 CHANnel on page 725 INPut 1 MCHannels n2 on page 722 INPut 1 AUDiobits on page 725 INPut 1 SAMPle FREQuency on page 725 INPut 1 SAMPle FREQuency MODE on page 725 INPut 1 FILTer on page 773 INPut 1 RESYnc on page 728 SENSe 1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 SENSe 1 HDMI ARCPort on page 728 SENSe 1 HDMI AUDio CODing on ...

Page 744: ...ANnel on page 734 INPut 1 RESYnc state Parameters state ONCE EXEC Manual operation See Hotplug detect on page 334 SENSe 1 HDMI ARCPort port Parameters port HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 HDMI5 HDMI6 Manual operation See ARC Port on page 326 SENSe 1 HDMI AUDio CODing coding Parameters coding PCM AUTodetect Manual operation See Coding on page 329 SENSe 1 HDMI AUDio CODing DETected STRing string Return valu...

Page 745: ...DMI AUDio INPut input Parameters input SINK SARC DIUnbal DIOptical Manual operation See Input on page 328 SENSe 1 HDMI AUDio N n Parameters n integer Manual operation See N on page 329 SENSe 1 HDMI CEC INIT init Parameters init ONCE Manual operation See CEC Handshake on page 326 SENSe 1 HDMI CEC HANDshake state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See CEC Handshake on page 326 SENSe 1 HDMI HDC...

Page 746: ... This is the standard operating mode of the measurement system to which the Audio Analyzer is set on switch on All types of measurements that are activated are per formed continuously Command INIT CONT ON starts a continuous measurement The START LED is on to indicate that the continuous measurement mode is active In this operation mode every change in the generator analyzer or filter bank trigger...

Page 747: ...RSTart ON Switches to the continuous measurement mode Any in pro gress continuous or single measurement is stopped A new con tinuous measurement is started This parameter changes the INITiate presetting to the continuous mode i e every sub sequent INITiate command without parameter starts a new continuous measurement and thus has the same effect as INITiate CONTinuous ON This command includes vari...

Page 748: ...See SINGLE on page 356 See START on page 357 See SINGLE on page 357 See START on page 358 See SINGLE on page 358 INITiate CONTinuous TIMeout timeout Only in conjunction with the command INITiate CONTinuous WAIT Defines the maximum time the bus is stopped If timeout occurs without a new measurement result being available the last measure ment result that was read out is returned Parameters timeout ...

Page 749: ...ONT on page 341 See START on page 355 See SINGLE on page 355 See STOP CONT on page 355 See START on page 356 See SINGLE on page 356 See STOP CONT on page 356 See START on page 357 See SINGLE on page 357 See START on page 358 See SINGLE on page 358 INITiate Starts a measurement according to the mode preset by INITiate CONTinuous continuous or single measurement ABORt Identical to INITiate FORCe STO...

Page 750: ...oints on page 349 TRIGger DELay delay Parameters delay float Manual operation See Delay on page 310 See Delay on page 333 See Delay on page 348 TRIGger FREQuency VARiation variation Parameters variation float Manual operation See Variation on page 352 TRIGger SOURce source Parameters source AUTO IMMediate TIMer CH1Freq CH2Freq CH1Level CH2Level CH1Trigger CH2Trigger TCHart CH1Rapidfreq CH2Rapidfre...

Page 751: ...nt value triggering see also Chapter 5 19 External Sweeps and Level Controlled Measured value Triggering on page 350 ARM FREQuency STARt on page 735 ARM FREQuency STOP on page 735 ARM LEVel MIN on page 735 ARM VOLTage STARt on page 736 ARM VOLTage STOP on page 736 TRIGger FREQuency VARiation on page 734 TRIGger VOLTage VARiation on page 735 ARM FREQuency STARt start Parameters start float Manual o...

Page 752: ...A n2 on page 736 SENSe 1 2 3 6 DATA ALL on page 738 SENSe 1 2 3 6 DATA n2 data The command retrieves the selected measurement result of the selected channel The type of measurement is defined by suffix 1 2 3 6 the channel by suffix n2 for suf fix range see below The figure below shows the assignment of remote control commands to the results indicated in the numeric display for an 8 channel analyze...

Page 753: ...s current frequency measurement result in the combined display with minimum and maximum values Suffix 1 2 3 6 selects the measurement to be read out 1 Function measurement result from column 1 6 Level Monitor measurement result from column 2 2 Input or Second Monitor measurement result from column 3 3 Frequency Phase or Group Delay measurement result from column 4 n2 1 2 3 8 selects channel 1 2 3 ...

Page 754: ... Response 1 0006 V 9 91E 37 1 00057 V 9 91E 37 1 00051 V 9 91E 37 9 91E 37 1 00051 V Example INIT CONT OFF WAI SENS3 DATA ALL Response 1000 HZ 9 91E 37 0 00248114 DEG 9 91E 37 0 00565384 DEG 9 91E 37 9 91E 37 0 0115933 DEG A query with MIN or MAX returns all stored minimum and maxi mum measurement results Usage Query only 7 5 5 Output of Trace Data Sets The commands are grouped for the following s...

Page 755: ...OUNt AX on page 744 TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD COUNt AY on page 744 TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD COUNt BX on page 744 TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD COUNt BY on page 744 TRACe BARGraph n2 STORe AY on page 825 TRACe BARGraph n2 STORe BY on page 825 TRACe FFT n2 LDList AX on page 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList AY on page 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList BX on page 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList BY on page 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt AX o...

Page 756: ...Nt BY on page 742 TRACe SWEep n2 STORe AX on page 825 TRACe SWEep n2 STORe AY on page 825 TRACe SWEep n2 STORe BX on page 825 TRACe SWEep n2 STORe BY on page 825 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList AX on page 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList AY on page 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList BX on page 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList BY on page 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList COUNt AX on page 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList COUNt A...

Page 757: ... specification occupies 2 in example Length indicates the number of subsequent bytes 34 in example binary block data binary block data of specified length ASCii Output as an ASCII string digits with sign decimal point and any exponent e g 57 1647 6 08881 32 304 53 6429 DISPlay BARGraph n2 SCANoffset scanoffset DISPlay FFT n2 SCANoffset scanoffset DISPlay WAVeform n2 SCANoffset scanoffset DISPlay S...

Page 758: ...LOAD COUNt and TRACe Subsys n2 LDList and TRACe Subsys n2 LDList COUNt AX designates the X axis of trace A AY designates the Y axis of trace A BX designates the X axis of trace B BY designates the Y axis of trace B In the case of a multiscan display or single display with min max traces the command DISPlay SWEep n2 SCANoffset on page 741 selects the desired scan The first example queries the sweep...

Page 759: ...FT n2 LOAD COUNt AX TRACe FFT n2 LOAD COUNt AY TRACe FFT n2 LOAD COUNt BX TRACe FFT n2 LOAD COUNt BY Commands for outputting FFT data and outputting the number of FFT data See also TRACe SWEep n2 LOAD COUNt BY on page 742 Suffix n2 1 2 subsystems 1 and 2 Return values argument integer float binary For the COUNt commands an integer value is returned The format of the return values of the other comm...

Page 760: ... LOAD AY TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD BX TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD BY TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD COUNt AX TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD COUNt AY TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD COUNt BX TRACe BARGraph n2 LOAD COUNt BY Commands for outputting bargraph trace data sets and outputting the number of bar graph data See also TRACe SWEep n2 LOAD COUNt BY on page 742 Suffix n2 1 2 subsystems 1 and 2 Return values argument integer floa...

Page 761: ...mmands depends on the FORMat setting If FORMat ASCii is selected float values are returned If FORMat REAL is selected a binary data block is returned Usage Query only TRACe FFT n2 LDList AX TRACe FFT n2 LDList AY TRACe FFT n2 LDList BX TRACe FFT n2 LDList BY TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt AX TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt AY TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt BX TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt BY The TRACe FFT n2 LDList c...

Page 762: ...2 LOAD commands see TRACe WAVeform n2 LOAD COUNt BY on page 744 They query the data records of filtered trace data and their number The filtering of the trace data is performed with command DISPlay WAVeform DLISt FILTer ALL LIMUpper LIMLower LIMBoth HARMonics PEAKs Suffix n2 1 subsystem 1 Return values argument integer float binary For the COUNt commands an integer value is returned The format of ...

Page 763: ...ned Usage Query only 7 5 6 Reading out Multi channel Records The DATA commands are used to read out multi channel records Only the traces which were available in the windows of the respective systems can be read out with the TRACe commands see Chapter 7 5 5 Output of Trace Data Sets on page 738 That is not enough for the 8 channel version that is why the traces for all channels switched on in the ...

Page 764: ...here is only one X axis for all channels Specifying a channel is nonetheless accepted as long as it is within the valid range Return values argument integer Example DATA SWEep COUNt X Reads out the number of X axis values from the sweep system Response 100 Usage Query only DATA FFT COUNt Y n4 DATA BARGraph COUNt Y n4 DATA SWEep COUNt Y n4 Commands to read out the number of values on the Y axis of ...

Page 765: ...weep system Response with the FORMat ASCii setting 100 120 045 144 109 172 997 207 675 249 304 Response with the FORMat REAL setting Lengthof length length block_data Usage Query only DATA FFT Y n3 DATA BARGraph Y n3 DATA SWEep Y n3 Commands for reading out the Y axis values of a SWEep an FFT or a BARGraph for the specified channel The example below is exemplary for the FFT and BARGraph sub system...

Page 766: ...utput of Protocol Errors SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor on page 750 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor CRC 1 2 on page 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor INV 1 2 on page 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor LOC 1 2 on page 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor PAR 1 2 on page 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor PCM 1 2 on page 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor Suffix 8 8 protocol analysis Return values argument integer return values 0 No error or n PCM1 PCM2 PA...

Page 767: ...e 8 PROTocol ERRor LOC 1 2 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor PAR 1 2 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor PCM 1 2 These commands query specific protocol errors Suffix 8 8 protocol analysis 1 2 selects channel 1 or 2 Return values argument integer Return values 0 no error 1 error Example SENS8 PROT PAR2 Response 1 A PAR2 error is present Usage Query only Manual operation See Error Flags on page 445 7 6 Sweep Options The sw...

Page 768: ...mmand selects all function measurements and several other types of measure ment see below The following description is valid for all types of measurements See also Chapter 5 15 Starting Measurements on page 337 Suffix 1 2 3 6 7 8 specifies the type of measurement 1 function measurement level signal to noise distortion 2 input monitor measurement 3 frequency phase or group delay measurement 6 level...

Page 769: ...Monitor on page 456 SENSe 1 FUNCtion APERture MODE mode Parameters mode NARRow MEDium WIDE AFASt AUTO FAST SFASt SLOW VALue GENTrack Manual operation See Meas Time on page 361 See Meas Time on page 364 See Meas Time on page 379 See Reject Bandw on page 393 See Meas Time on page 404 See Meas Time on page 421 See Meas Time on page 447 See Meas Time on page 450 SENSe 1 FUNCtion MMODe mmode Parameters...

Page 770: ...ILTer n2 on page 773 7 8 2 RMS and RMS Selective Measurement MMEMory LOAD FREQuency SLCFrequency on page 755 SENSe 1 BANDwidth on page 755 SENSe 1 BANDwidth MODE on page 755 SENSe 1 FREQuency on page 755 SENSe 1 FREQuency FACTor on page 755 SENSe 1 FREQuency SELect on page 755 SENSe 1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 SENSe 1 FUNCtion APERture MODE on page 753 SENSe 1 SWEep CONTrol on page 755 SENSe ...

Page 771: ... See Bandwidth on page 366 SENSe 1 BANDwidth MODE mode Parameters mode PPCT1 PPCT3 PTOCt POCT12 PFIX SPCT1 SPCT3 STOCt SOCT12 SFIX PFASt SFASt Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 366 SENSe 1 FREQuency frequency Parameters frequency float Manual operation See Freq Mode on page 371 SENSe 1 FREQuency FACTor factor Parameters factor float Manual operation See Factor on page 373 SENSe 1 FREQuency SE...

Page 772: ...ee Spacing on page 369 SENSe 1 SWEep STARt start Parameters start float Manual operation See Start on page 370 SENSe 1 SWEep STEP step Parameters step float Manual operation See Step on page 370 SENSe 1 SWEep STOP stop Parameters stop float Manual operation See Stop on page 370 SENSe 1 VOLTage INTVtime intvtime Parameters intvtime float Manual operation See Intv Time on page 374 SENSe 1 VOLTage IN...

Page 773: ...1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 7 9 Signal to Noise Measurements 7 9 1 S N Measurement Function SENSe 1 FILTer n2 on page 773 SENSe 1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 SENSe 1 FUNCtion APERture MODE on page 753 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DCSuppression on page 757 SENSe 1 FUNCtion MMODe on page 753 SENSe 1 VOLTage APERture on page 754 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DCSuppression dcsuppression Parameters dcsuppression ON OFF...

Page 774: ... page 759 MMEMory LOAD IEQualize iequalize Parameters iequalize string Manual operation See Equalizer on page 382 See Equalizer on page 405 See Equalizer on page 415 SENSe 1 FUNCtion BARGraph bargraph Parameters bargraph ON OFF Manual operation See Bargraph on page 383 See Bargraph on page 406 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT STATe state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Post FFT on page 407 See Po...

Page 775: ...ENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental on page 759 SENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental MODE on page 760 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DISTortion n3 distortion Parameters distortion ON OFF Manual operation See Even Harmonics Odd Harmonics on page 387 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DMAX Parameters value integer Manual operation See dmin dmax on page 387 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DMIN Parameters value integer Manual operation See dmin dmax on page 387 SEN...

Page 776: ... FUNCtion MMODe on page 753 SENSe 1 THDN REJection on page 760 SENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental on page 759 SENSe 1 VOLTage FUNDamental MODE on page 760 SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit LOWer lower Parameters lower float Manual operation See Frq Lim Low on page 395 See Frq Lim Low on page 406 See Freq Lim Low on page 416 See Frq Lim Low on page 427 SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit UPPer upper Parameters upper float Manu...

Page 777: ... page 773 SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit on page 762 SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit LOWer on page 760 SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit UPPer on page 760 SENSe 1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DCSuppression on page 757 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT AVERage on page 762 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT AVERage MODE on page 762 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT MTIMe on page 762 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT MODE on page 762 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT RES...

Page 778: ... AVERage average Parameters average integer Manual operation See Avg Count on page 418 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT AVERage MODE mode Parameters mode OFF NORMal EXPonential Manual operation See Avg Mode on page 417 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT MODE mode Parameters mode NORMal GAPLess OVERlapping Manual operation See FFT Mode on page 417 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT MTIMe Return values argument integer Usage Query only Ma...

Page 779: ...See FFT Size on page 407 See FFT Size on page 409 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT STARt Return values argument float Usage Query only Manual operation See Start on page 419 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT STOP Return values argument float Usage Query only Manual operation See Stop on page 419 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT TRIGgered triggered Parameters triggered ON OFF Manual operation See triggered on page 418 SENSe 1 FUNCtion...

Page 780: ...n DELay MODE on page 766 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DELay VALue on page 766 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMLower on page 808 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMLower VALue on page 809 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMUpper on page 809 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMUpper VALue on page 809 SOURce FADin VALue on page 764 SOURce FUNCtion on page 697 SOURce FILTer on page 776 SOURce INTerval on page 705 SOURce ONTime on page 705 SOURce SWEep FREQuency STARt on page 719 SOURce SWE...

Page 781: ... Suffix n3 2 9 harmonics 2 to 9 n4 1 4 sweep subsystem 1 to 4 Parameters distortion Boolean ON OFF Manual operation See Even Harmonics Odd Harmonics on page 426 SENSe 1 CHIRpbased MMODe SWEep n4 A mmode SENSe 1 CHIRpbased MMODe SWEep n4 B mmode Suffix n4 1 4 sweep subsystem 1 to 4 Parameters mmode FRQResponse PHAResponse THDLevel THD Manual operation See Fct SwpXTrY on page 425 SENSe 1 CHIRpbased ...

Page 782: ...Time Domain In addition to analysis in the frequency domain the R S UPP can also be used to analyze input signals in the time domain Time and frequency domain analysis can be performed simultaneously and irrespective of the selected measurement function Analysis in the time domain is selected by SENSe7 FUNCtion ON SENSe 1 7 CMPFactor on page 767 SENSe 1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 SENSe7 MMODe ...

Page 783: ... See Meas Mode on page 431 SENSe7 TRIGger AUTO state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Autotrigger on page 436 SENSe7 TRIGger LEVel level Parameters level float Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 435 SENSe7 TRIGger PRE pre Parameters pre float Manual operation See Pretrigger on page 435 SENSe7 TRIGger SLOPe slope Parameters slope RISing FALLing Manual operation See Trigger Slope...

Page 784: ...Tocol HIGHlight on page 768 SENSe8 PROTocol MODE on page 768 SENSe8 PROTocol PERSistence on page 768 SENSe8 PROTocol VIEW on page 769 SENSe8 PROTocol DISPlay display Parameters display ON OFF SENSe8 PROTocol MODE mode Parameters mode AUTomatic CONSumer PROFessional FILE Manual operation See Display Mode on page 441 SENSe8 PROTocol HIGHlight highlight Parameters highlight NOTHing FOUTput BETWeen FS...

Page 785: ...69 SENSe 1 FUNCtion REFTo refto Parameters refto TRGIn REFCh Manual operation See Refer to on page 421 SENSe 1 LIPSync AUDio THReshold HIGH high Parameters high float Manual operation See Auto Trigger Threshold High on page 422 7 17 Lip Sync Analysis Setting LIPSync at the SENSe FUNCtion command selects the Lip Sync analysis SENSe 1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 SENSe 1 FUNCtion APERture MODE on ...

Page 786: ...asurement Frequency phase and group delay measurement is selected by using suffix 3 at the SENSe n1 commands SENSe3 FREQuency APERture MODE on page 770 SENSe 1 2 3 6 7 8 FUNCtion on page 752 SENSe3 PHASe FORMat on page 770 SENSe3 FREQuency APERture MODE mode Parameters mode PRECision FAST Manual operation See Meas Time on page 453 SENSe3 PHASe FORMat format Parameters format POSitive POSNegative N...

Page 787: ...red measurements SENSe 1 FUNCtion SETTling COUNt on page 771 SENSe 1 FUNCtion SETTling MODE on page 771 SENSe 1 FUNCtion SETTling RESolution on page 772 SENSe 1 FUNCtion SETTling TOLerance on page 772 SENSe 1 FUNCtion SETTling TOUT on page 772 SENSe 1 TRIGger SETTling COUNt on page 771 SENSe 1 TRIGger SETTling MODE on page 771 SENSe 1 TRIGger SETTling RESolution on page 772 SENSe 1 TRIGger SETTlin...

Page 788: ...lters Analyzer pre filter command INPut FILTer This filter is inserted prior to the analysis functions Analyzer function filter command SENSe FILTer n2 Depending on the instrument and the active analyzer function up to three filters can be connected in series They are selected by suffix n2 Generator function filter command SOURce FILTer for several generator functions command SOURce MCHannel n2 FI...

Page 789: ...ILTer on page 776 SOURce STEReo n2 FILTer on page 777 INPut 1 FILTer filter see also Chapter 5 39 Filter on page 466 Parameters filter OFF UFIL1 UFIL2 UFIL3 UFIL4 UFIL5 UFIL6 UFIL7 UFIL8 UFIL9 AWE CARM CCIU CCIR CCIT CMES DEMP17 DCN DEMP5015 DEMP75 IECT JITT PEMP17 PEMP50 PEMP5015 PEMP75 HP22 HP400 LP22 LP30 LP80 AES17 CWE URUM WRUM An overview of the filters which can be set up in the analyzer an...

Page 790: ... operation See Filter on page 360 See Filter on page 378 See Filter on page 394 See Filter on page 404 See Filter on page 414 See Filter on page 426 SENSe 1 UFILter n2 ufilter Suffix n2 1 to 9 number of filter in the filter panel Parameters ufilter HPASs LPASs BPASs BSTop BSTOp NOTCh OCTave TOCTave FILE Manual operation See Filters 01 to 09 on page 470 SENSe 1 UFILter n2 ATTenuation attenuation Pa...

Page 791: ... Parameters passb float Manual operation See Passband on page 471 SENSe 1 UFILter n2 PASSb LOWer lower Parameters lower float Manual operation See Passb Low on page 472 SENSe 1 UFILter n2 PASSb UPPer upper Parameters upper float Manual operation See Passb Upp on page 473 SENSe 1 UFILter n2 STOPb stopb Parameters stopb float Manual operation See Stopband on page 472 SENSe 1 UFILter n2 STOPb LOWer l...

Page 792: ...n overview of the filters which can be set up in the analyzer and generator together with the remote control parameters is shown in Chapter 5 39 4 Filter Table on page 468 Manual operation See Filter on page 234 See Filter Filter Ch1 on page 238 See Filter on page 242 See Filter on page 244 See Filter on page 246 See Filter on page 249 See Filter on page 254 See Filter on page 256 See Filter Filte...

Page 793: ...n See Filter Ch2 on page 238 See Filter Ch2 on page 262 7 22 Auxiliaries Panel The AUXiliaries subsystem controls the Audio Monitor AUXiliaries AUDMonitor on page 777 AUXiliaries SIGSource on page 777 AUXiliaries SPEaker MONitor n3 on page 778 AUXiliaries SPEaker SOURce n3 on page 778 AUXiliaries SPEaker VOLume n3 on page 778 AUXiliaries TRIGger OUTPut DELay on page 778 AUXiliaries TRIGger OUTPut ...

Page 794: ...urce INPut FUNCtion DC Manual operation See Signal Source Sig Source 1 Sig Source 2 on page 486 AUXiliaries SPEaker VOLume n3 volume Suffix n3 1 2 selects the monitor Parameters volume integer Manual operation See Volume Volume 1 Volume 2 on page 487 AUXiliaries TRIGger OUTPut DELay delay Parameters delay float Manual operation See Mode on page 488 AUXiliaries TRIGger OUTPut ENABle enable Paramete...

Page 795: ...tion see the operating manual for the R S UPZ SWITcher COMPort on page 779 SWITcher INPA on page 779 SWITcher INPB on page 779 SWITcher OFFSet BVSA on page 780 SWITcher OFFSet OVSI on page 780 SWITcher OUTA on page 780 SWITcher OUTB on page 780 SWITcher STATe on page 780 SWITcher TRACking on page 780 SWITcher COMPort comport Parameters comport COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 AUTO Manual operation See COM Port...

Page 796: ...ameters ovsi integer Manual operation See Out vs Inp on page 492 SWITcher OUTA outa Parameters outa integer Manual operation See Output A on page 492 SWITcher OUTB outb Parameters outb integer Manual operation See Output B on page 492 SWITcher STATe state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Switcher on page 491 SWITcher TRACking tracking Parameters tracking OFF BVSA OVSI ALL Manual operat...

Page 797: ...DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMLower on page 791 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMLower SOURce on page 792 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMLower SOURce FILE on page 792 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMLower SOURce VALue on page 792 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMShift on page 792 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMShift PARallel on page 793 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMShift SYMMetrical on page 793 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMUpper on page 793 DIS...

Page 798: ...Rce VALue on page 792 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMShift on page 792 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMShift PARallel on page 793 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical on page 793 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMUpper on page 793 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMUpper SOURce on page 794 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMUpper SOURce FILE on page 794 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMUpper SOURce VALue on page 794 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B NO...

Page 799: ...T n2 A LIMLower SOURce on page 792 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMLower SOURce FILE on page 792 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMLower SOURce VALue on page 792 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMShift on page 792 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMShift PARallel on page 793 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMShift SYMMetrical on page 793 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMUpper on page 793 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMUpper SOURce on page 793 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMUpper SOURce FILE on page ...

Page 800: ...er on page 793 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMUpper SOURce on page 793 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMUpper SOURce FILE on page 794 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMUpper SOURce VALue on page 794 DISPlay FFT n2 B NORMalize on page 794 DISPlay FFT n2 B NORMalize VALue on page 795 DISPlay FFT n2 B REFerence on page 795 DISPlay FFT n2 B REFerence FILE on page 795 DISPlay FFT n2 B REFerence VALue on page 795 DISPlay FFT n2 B SPACing on...

Page 801: ... on page 791 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LEGend DESCription on page 791 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LEGend SHOW on page 791 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMLower on page 791 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMLower SOURce on page 792 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMLower SOURce FILE on page 792 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMLower SOURce VALue on page 792 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMShift on page 793 DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMShift PARallel on page 793 DISPlay SWEep...

Page 802: ...er SOURce VALue on page 792 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMShift on page 793 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMShift PARallel on page 793 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical on page 793 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMUpper on page 793 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMUpper SOURce on page 794 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMUpper SOURce FILE on page 794 DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMUpper SOURce VALue on page 794 DISPlay SWEep n2 B NORMalize on page 79...

Page 803: ...ing on page 802 DISPlay SWEep n2 X SOURce on page 802 DISPlay SWEep n2 X UNIT on page 802 DISPlay SWEep n2 X UNIT AUTO on page 803 DISPlay SWEep n2 X UNIT USER on page 803 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A BOTTom on page 790 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A CHANnel on page 790 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LABel AUTO on page 790 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LABel USER on page 790 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LEGend DESCription on page 791 DI...

Page 804: ...791 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMLower on page 791 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMLower SOURce on page 792 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMLower SOURce FILE on page 792 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMLower SOURce VALue on page 792 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMShift on page 792 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMShift PARallel on page 793 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical on page 793 DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMUpper on page 793...

Page 805: ...page 803 MMEMory BARGraph n2 LIMit OFFSet on page 803 MMEMory BARGraph n2 LIMit OFFSet VALue on page 804 MMEMory BARGraph n2 STAS on page 804 MMEMory BARGraph n2 STORe on page 804 MMEMory BARGraph n2 TRACe on page 804 MMEMory FFT n2 EQUalization INVert on page 803 MMEMory FFT n2 EQUalization MODify on page 803 MMEMory FFT n2 EQUalization NORMfrequency on page 803 MMEMory FFT n2 LIMit OFFSet on pag...

Page 806: ...ph n2 A CHANnel channel DISPlay BARGraph n2 B CHANnel channel DISPlay SWEep n2 A CHANnel channel DISPlay SWEep n2 B CHANnel channel Parameters channel OFF CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 Manual operation See Channel on page 521 DISPlay FFT n2 A LABel AUTO state DISPlay FFT n2 B LABel AUTO state DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LABel AUTO state DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LABel AUTO state DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LABe...

Page 807: ...al operation See Title Descript Leg A Descript Leg B Descript on page 554 DISPlay FFT n2 A LEGend SHOW state DISPlay FFT n2 B LEGend SHOW state DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LEGend SHOW state DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LEGend SHOW state DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LEGend SHOW state DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LEGend SHOW state DISPlay SWEep n2 A LEGend SHOW state DISPlay SWEep n2 B LEGend SHOW state Parameters state ON OF...

Page 808: ...ILE file DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMLower SOURce FILE file DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMLower SOURce FILE file DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMLower SOURce FILE file Parameters file string Manual operation See Source Filename on page 541 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMLower SOURce VALue value DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMLower SOURce VALue value DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LIMLower SOURce VALue value DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMLower SOURce VAL...

Page 809: ...lay FFT n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical symmetrical DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LIMShift SYMMetrical symmetrical DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical symmetrical DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMShift SYMMetrical symmetrical DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical symmetrical DISPlay SWEep n2 A LIMShift SYMMetrical symmetrical DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical symmetrical Parameters symmetrical float M...

Page 810: ...file DISPlay SWEep n2 B LIMUpper SOURce FILE file Parameters file string Manual operation See Source Filename on page 539 DISPlay FFT n2 A LIMUpper SOURce VALue value DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMUpper SOURce VALue value DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LIMUpper SOURce VALue value DISPlay WAVeform n2 B LIMUpper SOURce VALue value DISPlay BARGraph n2 A LIMUpper SOURce VALue value DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LIMUpper SOURce ...

Page 811: ...rence Parameters reference VALue FILE HOLD IFILe MEASpanel MAXimum XCURsor OCURsor REF997 REF1000 CH1Meas CH2Meas GENTrack NOISedensity DBNOisedensity MREFchannel Manual operation See Reference on page 523 DISPlay FFT n2 A REFerence FILE file DISPlay FFT n2 B REFerence FILE file DISPlay BARGraph n2 A REFerence FILE file DISPlay BARGraph n2 B REFerence FILE file DISPlay SWEep n2 A REFerence FILE fi...

Page 812: ...OP top DISPlay BARGraph n2 A TOP top DISPlay BARGraph n2 B TOP top DISPlay SWEep n2 A TOP top DISPlay SWEep n2 B TOP top Parameters top float Manual operation See Top on page 534 DISPlay FFT n2 A UNIT unit DISPlay FFT n2 B UNIT unit DISPlay WAVeform n2 A UNIT unit DISPlay WAVeform n2 B UNIT unit DISPlay BARGraph n2 A UNIT unit DISPlay BARGraph n2 B UNIT unit DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT unit DISPlay SW...

Page 813: ... n2 A UNIT USER user DISPlay FFT n2 B UNIT USER user DISPlay WAVeform n2 A UNIT USER user DISPlay WAVeform n2 B UNIT USER user DISPlay BARGraph n2 A UNIT USER user DISPlay BARGraph n2 B UNIT USER user DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT USER user DISPlay SWEep n2 B UNIT USER user Parameters user string Manual operation See Unit User String on page 532 DISPlay FFT n2 A UPDate update DISPlay FFT n2 B UPDate upd...

Page 814: ...meters for Waveform subsystem OFF LEV1 LEV2 FILEA FILEB LEVel Parameters for Bargraph subsystem OFF FUNC1 FUNC2 FILEA FILEB FUNCtion Manual operation See Y Source on page 512 DISPlay FFT n2 A YSOurce FILE file DISPlay FFT n2 B YSOurce FILE file DISPlay WAVeform n2 A YSOurce FILE file DISPlay WAVeform n2 B YSOurce FILE file DISPlay BARGraph n2 A YSOurce FILE file DISPlay BARGraph n2 B YSOurce FILE ...

Page 815: ... BX TRACe Subsys n2 LDList BY The IEC IEEE bus command specifies which data is saved read Parameters filter ALL LIMUpper LIMLower LIMBoth HARMonics PEAKs ALL all LIMUpper Only those values that exceed the upper limit LIMLower Only the values which are below the lower limit value LIMBoth Only those values that exceed the upper limit and fall below the lower limit HARMonics Only harmonics PEAKs Part...

Page 816: ...ISPlay SWEep n2 TITLe DESCription description Parameters description string Manual operation See Title Descript Leg A Descript Leg B Descript on page 554 DISPlay FFT n2 TITLe SHOW state DISPlay WAVeform n2 TITLe SHOW state DISPlay BARGraph n2 TITLe SHOW state DISPlay SWEep n2 TITLe SHOW state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Show Title Show Leg A Show Leg B on page 554 DISPlay FFT n2 T...

Page 817: ...X AXIS axis Parameters axis selection TIME VOLTage FREQuency PHASe VDIGital Manual operation See X axis on page 546 DISPlay FFT n2 X LABel AUTO state DISPlay WAVeform n2 X LABel AUTO state DISPlay SWEep n2 X LABel AUTO state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Label Auto on page 549 DISPlay FFT n2 X LABel USER user DISPlay WAVeform n2 X LABel USER user DISPlay SWEep n2 X LABel USER user P...

Page 818: ...Eep n2 X SCALing scaling Parameters scaling AUTO MANual Manual operation See Scaling on page 550 DISPlay SWEep n2 X SOURce source Parameters source SWEep HOLD MANual LRMS LDC LPEak FREQuency Manual operation See X Source on page 544 DISPlay FFT n2 X SPACing spacing DISPlay WAVeform n2 X SPACing spacing DISPlay SWEep n2 X SPACing spacing Parameters spacing LINear LOGarithmic Manual operation See Sp...

Page 819: ...alization INVert state MMEMory SWEep n2 EQUalization INVert state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Invert on page 556 MMEMory FFT n2 EQUalization MODify state MMEMory SWEep n2 EQUalization MODify state Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Modify Equ on page 557 MMEMory FFT n2 EQUalization NORMfrequency normfrequency MMEMory SWEep n2 EQUalization NORMfrequency normfrequency Para...

Page 820: ...ace as on page 555 MMEMory FFT n2 STORe store MMEMory WAVeform n2 STORe store MMEMory BARGraph n2 STORe store MMEMory SWEep n2 STORe store Parameters store filename Manual operation See Store Trace to on page 558 MMEMory FFT n2 TRACe trace MMEMory BARGraph n2 TRACe trace MMEMory SWEep n2 TRACe trace Parameters trace A B Manual operation See Trace on page 556 SENSe 1 2 6 CONFig COPYother state Suff...

Page 821: ...n page 808 SENSe3 GROupdelay REFerence on page 808 SENSe 1 2 6 LEFT on page 808 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMLower on page 808 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMLower VALue on page 809 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMUpper on page 809 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMUpper VALue on page 809 SENSe3 PHASe LEFT on page 809 SENSe3 PHASe LIMLower on page 810 SENSe3 PHASe LIMLower VALue on page 810 SENSe3 PHASe LIMUpper on page 810 SENSe3 PHASe LIMUpper VALue on page 81...

Page 822: ... Parameters limlower ON OFF Manual operation See Limit Lower on page 592 SENSe3 FREQuency LIMLower VALue value Suffix 3 frequency phase and group delay measurement Parameters value float Manual operation See Limit Lower on page 592 SENSe3 FREQuency LIMUpper limupper Suffix 3 frequency phase and group delay measurement Parameters limupper ON OFF Manual operation See Limit Upper on page 594 SENSe3 F...

Page 823: ...6Store CH7Store CH8Store Manual operation See Reference on page 588 SENSe3 FREQuency RIGHt right Suffix 3 frequency phase or group delay measurement Parameters right float Manual operation See Right on page 590 SENSe3 FREQuency UNAuto unauto Suffix 3 frequency phase or group delay measurement Parameters state ON OFF Manual operation See Unit Auto on page 585 SENSe3 FREQuency UNIT unit Suffix 3 fre...

Page 824: ...loat Manual operation See Reference on page 588 SENSe 1 2 6 LEFT left Suffix 1 2 6 specifies the type of measurement 1 function measurement level signal to noise distortion 2 input or second monitor measurement 6 level monitor measurement Parameters left float Manual operation See Left on page 590 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMLower limlower Suffix 1 2 6 specifies the type of measurement 1 function measurement l...

Page 825: ...ement 1 function measurement level signal to noise distortion 2 input or second monitor measurement 6 level monitor measurement Parameters limupper ON OFF Manual operation See Limit Upper on page 594 SENSe 1 2 6 LIMUpper VALue value Suffix 1 2 6 specifies the type of measurement 1 function measurement level signal to noise distortion 2 input or second monitor measurement 6 level monitor measuremen...

Page 826: ...ue float Manual operation See Limit Lower on page 592 SENSe3 PHASe LIMUpper limupper Suffix 3 frequency phase or group delay measurement Parameters limupper ON OFF Manual operation See Limit Upper on page 594 SENSe3 PHASe LIMUpper VALue value Suffix 3 frequency phase or group delay measurement Parameters value float Manual operation See Limit Upper on page 594 SENSe3 PHASe REFerence reference Suff...

Page 827: ...t Parameters right float Manual operation See Right on page 590 SENSe3 PHASe UNAuto unauto Suffix 3 frequency phase or group delay measurement Parameters unauto ON OFF Manual operation See Unit Auto on page 585 SENSe3 PHASe UNIT unit Suffix 3 frequency phase or group delay measurement Parameters unit selection Manual operation See Unit on page 585 SENSe3 PHASe USERunit userunit Suffix 3 frequency ...

Page 828: ...or measurement Parameters mode CH1Meas CH2Meas VALue STORe SOURce GENTrack MREFchannel CH1Store CH2Store CH3Store CH4Store CH5Store CH6Store CH7Store CH8Store Manual operation See Reference on page 588 SENSe 1 2 6 RIGHt right Suffix 1 2 6 specifies the type of measurement 1 function measurement level signal to noise distortion 2 input or second monitor measurement 6 level monitor measurement Param...

Page 829: ... of the Graphical Display This section includes all commands of the softkey menu of the graphical and list dis plays These commands cannot be recorded Only a few commands are allowed in all subsystems Commands that are not allowed in a subsystem are not listed here In the BARGraph subsystem for example there are no markers The DISPlay BARGraph n2 A B MARKer HARMonics ON OFF command is thus not all...

Page 830: ...e 817 DISPlay FFT n2 A MARKer SETTo OCURsor on page 817 DISPlay FFT n2 A MARKer SETTo XCURsor on page 817 DISPlay FFT n2 A MARKer SETTo XPOS on page 818 DISPlay FFT n2 B MARKer HARMonics on page 816 DISPlay FFT n2 B MARKer MODE on page 817 DISPlay FFT n2 B MARKer SETTo OCURsor on page 817 DISPlay FFT n2 B MARKer SETTo XCURsor on page 817 DISPlay FFT n2 B MARKer SETTo XPOS on page 818 DISPlay FFT n...

Page 831: ...OCURsor MODE on page 818 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor POSMode on page 819 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MAX on page 820 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MIN on page 820 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MRKA on page 821 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MRKB on page 821 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo XPOS on page 822 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo YPOS on page 822 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor STATe on page 823 D...

Page 832: ... OCURsor SETTo XPOS on page 822 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo YPOS on page 822 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor STATe on page 823 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor Y on page 823 DISPlay WAVeform n2 XCURsor MODE on page 818 DISPlay WAVeform n2 XCURsor POSMode on page 819 DISPlay WAVeform n2 XCURsor SETTo MAX on page 820 DISPlay WAVeform n2 XCURsor SETTo MIN on page 820 DISPlay WAVeform n2 XCURsor SETTo MR...

Page 833: ...et marker to maximum of trace A Marker changes with maxi mum Example DISPlay FFT B MARKer MODE TRKMax DISPlay FFT n2 A MARKer SETTo OCURsor state DISPlay FFT n2 A MARKer SETTo XCURsor state DISPlay FFT n2 B MARKer SETTo OCURsor state DISPlay FFT n2 B MARKer SETTo XCURsor state DISPlay WAVeform n2 A MARKer SETTo OCURsor state DISPlay WAVeform n2 A MARKer SETTo XCURsor state DISPlay WAVeform n2 B MA...

Page 834: ...ISPlay SWEep n2 A MARKer SETTo XPOS xpos DISPlay SWEep n2 B MARKer SETTo XPOS xpos Corresponds to the softkey operation Marker Trace A Trace B Set to Value Parameters xpos float Set marker to a position on the X axis The unit for entering the value depends on the unit of the X axis Example DISPlay FFT2 B MARKer SETTo XPOS 12 345 Hz DISPlay FFT n2 OCURsor MODE mode DISPlay FFT n2 XCURsor MODE mode ...

Page 835: ... n2 XCURsor POSMode posmode DISPlay BARGraph n2 OCURsor POSMode posmode DISPlay BARGraph n2 XCURsor POSMode posmode DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor POSMode posmode DISPlay SWEep n2 XCURsor POSMode posmode Corresponds to softkey operation Cursor O cursor X cursor Movement Next Pixel Next Bin Next Sample Next Value Next Step Next Peak Next Har monic Parameters posmode PIXel POINt PEAK HARMonic PIXel Pixel ...

Page 836: ...ey operation Cursor Set O Cursor Set X Cursor Max Parameters state ONCE EXEC ONCE or EXEC can also be omitted ONCE Sets O cursor X Cursor to the curve peak EXEC Alias to ONCE Example DISPlay SWEep4 OCURsor SETTo MAX DISPlay SWEep4 OCURsor SETTo MAX ONCE DISPlay SWEep4 OCURsor SETTo MAX EXEC the three commands are equivalent DISPlay FFT n2 OCURsor SETTo MIN state DISPlay FFT n2 XCURsor SETTo MIN st...

Page 837: ...SETTo MRKA state DISPlay SWEep n2 XCURsor SETTo MRKA state Corresponds to softkey operation Cursor Set O cursor Set X cursor Marker A Parameters state ONCE EXEC ONCE or EXEC can also be omitted ONCE Sets O cursor X cursor to the position of marker A EXEC Alias to ONCE Example DISPlay SWEep4 XCURsor SETTo MRKA DISPlay SWEep4 XCURsor SETTo MRKA ONCE DISPlay SWEep4 XCURsor SETTo MRKA EXEC the three c...

Page 838: ...Cursor Set O cursor Set X cursor Value Parameters xpos float Sets O cursor X cursor to the defined value if a vertical cursor is involved The unit in which the value is entered depends on the unit of the X axis Example DISPlay WAVeform OCURsor SETTo XPOS 12 345 Hz DISPlay FFT n2 OCURsor SETTo YPOS ypos DISPlay FFT n2 XCURsor SETTo YPOS ypos DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo YPOS ypos DISPlay WAVef...

Page 839: ...r STATe state DISPlay SWEep n2 XCURsor STATe state Corresponds to softkey operation Cursor O cursor X cursor O active X active Parameters state OFF ACTive INACtive OFF O cursor X cursor off ACTive O cursor X cursor is visible as a solid line and is controlled via TAB and Shift TAB INACtive O cursor X cursor is visible as a dotted line and can not be con trolled Example DISPlay BARGraph OCURsor STA...

Page 840: ...n the multisine frequencies with a noise floor between This is not the usual display mode of a frequency response curve The K1 macro now generates a sweep trace data set from the levels of the individual bins and their frequency values This data set is transferred to the Audio Analyzer and is shown in the graphical display as a sweep trace and thus as a frequency response curve When transferring t...

Page 841: ...d for saving sweep graph trace data sets AX designates the X axis of trace A AY designates the Y axis of trace A BX designates the X axis of trace B BY designates the Y axis of trace B In the case of a multiscan display or single display with MIN MAX traces the com mand DISPlay SWEep n2 SCANoffset on page 741 selects the desired scan Suffix n2 subsystem number 1 to 4 Parameters by float Example TR...

Page 842: ...s and IEC IEEE bus control programs The K1 macro or the IEC IEEE bus control program saves data in the form of strings or binary data in the available data buffers from where it can be collected and further pro cessed by the other program However these buffers can also be used as data buffers within one of the programs SYSTem MEMory DATA n3 on page 826 SYSTem MEMory FREE on page 828 SYSTem MEMory ...

Page 843: ...ace data SYSTem MEMory DATA6 TRACe SWEep3 LOAD AY TRACe SWEep3 LOAD COUNt AY Trace data SYSTem MEMory DATA7 TRACe SWEep3 LOAD BY TRACe SWEep3 LOAD COUNt BY Trace data SYSTem MEMory DATA8 TRACe SWEep4 LOAD AY TRACe SWEep4 LOAD COUNt AY Trace data SYSTem MEMory DATA9 TRACe SWEep4 LOAD BY TRACe SWEep4 LOAD COUNt BY Suffix n3 1 to 1024 1024 data sets Note that only data sets 1 to 89 are used for Chirp...

Page 844: ...a string in the string buffer Any strings up to a length of 540 bytes can be cached in up to 1024 memory locations Suffix n3 1 to 1024 1024 memory locations Parameters string string The maximum string length is 540 bytes If the contents of the string buffer are deleted with command SYSTem MMEMory FREE STRing the query SYSTem MMEMory STRing n3 returns the string empty Example SYSTem MEMory STRing10...

Page 845: ...E CLIPboard Manual operation See Destination on page 495 HCOPy FILE file Parameters file file name Manual operation See Filename on page 497 HCOPy FILE MODE mode Parameters mode NEW OVERwrite INCRement Manual operation See Store Mode on page 497 HCOPy IMMediate Usage Event Manual operation See HCOPY on page 631 HCOPy SOURce source Parameters source WINDow GRAPhics Manual operation See Source on pa...

Page 846: ...irectories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files The various drives can be selected using the mass storage unit specifier msus The internal hard disk is selected with D and a memory stick plugged in at the USB interface with E The resources of a network can also be selected with msus in the syntax of the respective network e g using the UNC format Universal Namin...

Page 847: ... conjunction with the commands the parameter file_name is specified as a string parameter with quotation marks It can contain either the complete path including the drive only the path and file name or only the file name The file name must include the file extension The same applies for the parameters direc tory_name and path Depending on how much information is provided either the values specifie...

Page 848: ...e setup Windows that were open when the setup was saved are opened and windows that were closed when the setup was saved are closed again This is also done for the screens that are not visi ble Parameters file string file name where the setup was stored by MMEMory STORe STATe MMEMory STORe STATe file name Saving a setup in a setupfile Parameters file name string Specifies the file name in which th...

Page 849: ...g the same name MMEMory DATA file_name binary block data This command copies the block data binary block data to the file designated with file_name The R S UPP accepts the line message EOI and or the ASCII character NL 0Ah as an indication that data transmission has been completed The binary data stream must be concluded with EOI or NL or EOI followed by NL If the data stream is not concluded with...

Page 850: ... a subdirectory of the default directory is created A directory tree can also be created by using this command Example MMEM MDIR carrier Creates subdirectory carrier in the current directory Usage Event MMEMory MOVE file_source msus_source file_destination msus_destination This command renames an existing file if file_destination does not contain a path specification Otherwise the file is moved to...

Page 851: ...ture applications the most significant bit d15 may also be set STATus PRESet on page 836 STATus OPERation CONDition on page 836 STATus OPERation ENABle on page 836 STATus OPERation EVENt on page 837 STATus OPERation NTRansition on page 837 STATus OPERation PTRansition on page 837 STATus QUEStionable CONDition on page 837 STATus QUEStionable ENABle on page 838 STATus QUEStionable EVENt on page 838 ...

Page 852: ...re set to FFFFh 65535 i e all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected The NTRansition parts of all status registers are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 of a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of all status registers are set to 0 i e none of the events in these registers is passed on The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value STATus OPERation CONDi...

Page 853: ...he bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus OPERation reg ister A bit set in the NTRansition register causes a bit transition from 1 to 0 in the CONDition register to produce an entry in the EVENt register Reading the information does not clear the register Parameters integer 0 32767 STATus OPERation PTRansition integer The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation re...

Page 854: ...s in the EVENt register are set due to a bit transition from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 depends on the bits set in the PTRansition and the NTRansition registers Reading the information clears the register Return values argument integer Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable NTRansition integer The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register A bit set in the NTRansiti...

Page 855: ...Tus QUEStionable UNDerrange EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus QUEStionable UNDERrange register This part contains the information about the current instrument state since the last readout A bit set in the EVENt register indicates a change of the corresponding bit in the CONDition register Whether bits in the EVENt register are set due to a bit transition from 0 ...

Page 856: ...Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable OVERrange ENABle integer The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus QUEStionable OVERrange register This setting determines which events of the status event part are to be passed on to summary bit 1 of the STATus QUEStionable register These events can be used to trigger a service request Parameters integer 0 65535 STATus QUEStionable OVERrange E...

Page 857: ...NDition part to produce an entry in the EVENt part of the register Reading the information does not clear the register Parameters integer 0 65535 STATus QUEStionable MEASuring CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable MEASuring register This part contains the information about which channel of a multichannel instrument is activated or deactivated Re...

Page 858: ...Ransition part of the STATus QUEStionable MEASuring register A bit set in the NTRansition part causes a bit transition from 1 to 0 in the CONDition part to produce an entry in the EVENt part of the register Reading the information does not clear the register Parameters integer 0 65535 STATus QUEStionable MEASuring PTRansition integer The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus ...

Page 859: ...ter Whether bits in the EVENt register are set due to a bit transition from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 depends on the bits set in the PTRansition and the NTRansition registers Reading the information clears the register Return values argument integer Usage Query only STATus XQUEstionabl NTRansition integer The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus XQUEStionable register A bit set ...

Page 860: ...s on page 845 SYSTem DISPlay EXPLanation n3 HIDE on page 846 SYSTem DISPlay EXPLanation n3 SHOW on page 845 SYSTem DISPlay EXPLanation n3 TEXT on page 846 SYSTem DISPlay SCPiupdate on page 846 SYSTem MAXChdisp on page 846 SYSTem PRESet on page 846 SYSTem PROFile CLIPboard on page 846 SYSTem PROFile FILE on page 846 SYSTem PROFile PRINter on page 847 SYSTem PROFile SCReen on page 847 SYSTem PROGram...

Page 861: ...IB Address on page 493 SYSTem DISPlay EXPLanation n3 SHOW show This command inserts up to 10 comment windows on the display The comment text is entered with command SYSTem DISPlay EXPLanation n3 TEXT The windows are hidden again with command SYSTem DISPlay EXPLanation n3 HIDE Suffix n3 1 to 10 Index of comment window to be indicated on the display Parameters show string x p1 y p2 w p3 h p4 p1 p2 c...

Page 862: ...ex of the comment window to be hidden Usage Event SYSTem DISPlay SCPiupdate scpiupdate Parameters scpiupdate ON OFF Manual operation See SCPI update on page 494 SYSTem MAXChdisp maxchdisp Parameters maxchdisp integer Manual operation See Max Ch Disp on page 498 SYSTem PRESet This command triggers an instrument reset The command has the same effect as Menu File Preset Load Default or the RST comman...

Page 863: ...s in the R S UPP K1 software option see also the description for the R S UPP K9x Parameters execute command line Console command line for Windows Example SYST PROG EXEC C Program Files test exe arg1 arg2 arg3 arg4 starts the test exe Windows program with the arg1 arg2 arg3 and arg4 arguments and maintains execution until the program is ended SYSTem QLONg qlong Parameters qlong ON OFF Manual operat...

Page 864: ...SYSTem SINFo MAC Return values address String The MAC address Media Access Control Address is the hard ware address of the network adapter It identifies the instrument in the network The address is returned as string in hexa decimal format 00 1E C9 48 6E 60 Usage Query only SYSTem VERSion This command queries the SCPI version with which the instrument is compliant The SCPI version is returned in t...

Page 865: ...s via LAN A cascade is set up by manual operation of the CASCADE button on the measuring instruments involved whereas the instruments are set up using the GUI of the master or by remote control of the master from a control computer via IEC IEEE bus or LAN 8 2 Order Code of Instruments To assemble a cascade a master instrument and at least one slave are required Master devices can only be 8 channel...

Page 866: ...is passed from slave to slave by means of a daisy chain Beginning with the master the CLOCK OUT BNC output is connected to the CLOCK IN BNC input on the rear of the next instrument in the chain Commercially available 50 Ω BNC cables are used as connecting lines 8 3 2 Trigger Lines The trigger event for starting the measured value acquisition is always generated by the master device and also distri...

Page 867: ...the reference signal for the phase measurement as described in the section Reference and Trigger Channel 8 3 3 Communication Lines To allow the instruments to communicate with each other and the cascade to be con trolled by means of a control computer all components involved are interconnected via a LAN switch The cascade and the individual slaves are always set up using the master R S UPP This ca...

Page 868: ... shortest possible cables should be used The maximum depth of a cascade is 5 slaves 8 3 4 Numbering of Channels Regardless of whether a cascade comprises R S UPP instruments of different var iants R S UPP800 R S UPP400 R S UPP200 the channels are always numbered consecutively and continuously beginning with the master and then all slaves Connection of a Cascade ...

Page 869: ... the num bering of the channels will not be continuous in the measured value display of the mas ter Channels that are switched off are not omitted from the numbering they simply do not provide any measurement result OFF appears in the numeric display and the value 9 91e 38 appears in remote operation Connection of a Cascade ...

Page 870: ...function as slaves Each R S UPP that detects a clock signal at its CLOCK IN BNC socket on the rear of the instrument automatically assumes the role of a standalone slave whereas each instrument without a reference clock signal initially functions as a standalone device Only R S UPP800 instruments audio analyzer 8 channels with installed software option R S UPP K800 can assume the role of a master ...

Page 871: ...e CAS CADED is set and the user returns to the WAITING_FOR_SLAVES state by pressing the button and can continue with the configuration of other slaves If the integration of a slave fails the master assumes an ERROR state and then either changes to its initial MASTER_STANDALONE state or returns to the MASTER_CAS CADED state in cases where at least one slave had already been integrated in the cascad...

Page 872: ...dition ERROR LED flashes If the ERROR LED remains lit this indicates that an error has occurred during SCPI control If an error is no longer present following readout of the error queue using SYST ERR the red LED goes out 8 4 1 3 Configuration of Slave Device The programming routine using the CASCADE LAN RESET button is visualized using a constellation diagram A flashing signal sequence at the CAS...

Page 873: ...the slave changes to the CONNECTION_REQUEST state in which the connection to the master is set up and the master is informed of the desired position within the cascade If the slave could not be integrated in the cascade at position X the state machine changes to an ERROR state and assumes its initial state again If the master successfully receives the acknowledge signal the slave assumes the SLAVE...

Page 874: ..._SHOW_STATUS Slave displays its position within the cascade Figure 8 1 Not cascaded Figure 8 2 Slave 1 Figure 8 3 Slave 2 Figure 8 4 Slave 3 Figure 8 5 Slave 4 Figure 8 6 Slave 5 PROG_MODE_SLAVE_ X Slave starts connection request to the master for it to be integrated in the cascade as Slave_ X Figure 8 7 Slave 1 Configuration of a Cascade ...

Page 875: ...ing indicates that a connection is being set up e g after power up or if the cascade is incomplete because for example an instrument has not been switched on ERROR Error condition ERROR LED flashes If the ERROR LED remains lit this indicates that an error has occurred during SCPI control If an error is no longer present following readout of the error queue using SYST ERR the red LED goes out Confi...

Page 876: ...E LED to signal the current slave number by flashing briefly Slave Show Status One flash indicates number 1 two flashes indicate number 2 and so on When a cascade is initially set up the slave signals number 1 If the cascade is already set up the current slave number can be checked in this way If the button is then no longer pressed the slave exits the Slave Show Status mode automatically after ap...

Page 877: ... i e first slave 1 then slave 2 and not vice versa 8 4 3 Switching Cascade Off and On Again All instruments in an operationally ready cascade should be switched off using their standby buttons within 5 minutes of each other this also applies when switching on the instruments again When switched on the instruments automatically reconnect to the cascade in exactly the same instrument arrangement as ...

Page 878: ...hapter 8 4 4 Dissolving Cascade on page 861 and to reconfigure them see Chapter 8 4 1 Con figuration Using CASCADE Button on page 854 or Chapter 8 4 2 Examples of Cas cade Configuration on page 860 Make sure that the LAN LED is lit on all instruments If the instruments cannot be connected to form an operational cascade by following the described procedure the clock line should be disconnected at e...

Page 879: ...itched off and back on 8 5 Operating Modes A cascade can behave like a single R S UPP with a correspondingly large number of channels if all instruments have identical analyzer settings and measurement functions in particular However the instruments in the cascade can also be controlled and set individually to enable multichannel measurements with different analyzer configurations and mea surement...

Page 880: ...cerning the configuration of a cascade in the ALL operating mode are mentioned below Reference and trigger channel In the cascade the parameter fields Ref Channel and Trigger Chan in the Analyzer Config panel have a special meaning Ref Channel allows a reference channel for the phase measurement to be designa ted If the phase measurement is to be performed across the entire cascade see fig ure abo...

Page 881: ...election The channels selected in the Analyzer Config panel of the analog instrument Meas Channels are forwarded to the slaves 1 1 The logical channel number within the cas cade is derived from the number of the slave Coupling If AC DC Coupl Track was selected in the Analyzer Config panel of the master the All Couplings setting of the master is transferred to all slaves Manual Operation of a Casca...

Page 882: ... largely like a device with many channels but slightly different channel settings then use GUI Control All to configure the default setting for the coupling and range per track to set the exceptions for the individual slaves afterwards with GUI Control Slave XX 8 6 1 2 GUI Control Master The operation refers only to the master All settings concerning the analyzer and the measurement function have ...

Page 883: ... are displayed 8 7 Remote Control 8 7 1 Operating Slaves from Master As with manual operation the entire cascade is controlled from the master The master is connected to a control computer via LAN or IEC IEEE bus and controls its slaves via LAN connection fully automatically 8 7 2 Distribution of SCPI Commands in Cascade The SCPI command CASCade ASSignment ALL MASTer SLAVexx deter mines whether su...

Page 884: ...nd slave and its channel 4 Command addressing a specific channel Comment INPut MCHannels ch ON OFF Switches channels on off INPut ch COUPling AC DC AC DC coupling A channel specification is only significant if the asso ciated command INPut COUPling CHANnels SPLit TRACk is set to SPLit SENSe 1 VOLTage RANGe ch MODE AUTO FIX LOWER Range settings A channel specification is only significant if the ass...

Page 885: ...rticularity in the cascading the query responses of the individual instruments are connected with Example The cascade consists of a master and 2 slaves OUTPut TYPE contains no channel information and in the CASCade ASSignment ALL operating mode is sent by the master to itself and to the two slaves All instru ments respond and the response strings are joined together with Response BAL BAL BAL The s...

Page 886: ... 234 V 9 91e 37 1 234 V 9 91e 37 1 234 V 1 234 V 1 234 V 1 234 V 2 234 V 2 234 V 2 234 V 2 234 V 2 234 V 2 234 V 2 234 V 2 234 V 3 234 V 3 234 V 3 234 V 3 234 V 3 234 V 3 234 V 3 234 V 3 234 V Of course it would be more straightforward to retrieve the data sets from the master and slaves in specific blocks e g CASC ASS MASTer SENS DATA ALL Possible response 1 234 V 9 91e 37 1 234 V 9 91e 37 1 234 ...

Page 887: ...nment ALL Commands are forwarded by the master to all slaves Whenever an error message occurs in a slave it is sent to the master by an asynchro nous event mechanism without intervention by the user All error messages therefore accumulate in the master i e its own messages and those of the slaves The error queue is read out using the SYST ERR command Example With CASCade ASSignment ALL followed by...

Page 888: ...ST ERR com mand is specifically sent to a slave The error queue of a slave cannot be queried it would always be empty anyway because the slaves immediately send their error mes sages to the master 8 7 3 4 Cascading and Status System Status registers The status registers for the R S UPP in conjunction with cascading appear as follows Remote Control ...

Page 889: ...Cascading R S UPP 873 User Manual 1411 1055 32 10 By comparison the following figure shows the status registers of a R S UPP as a standalone instrument Remote Control ...

Page 890: ...11 1055 32 10 Figure 8 12 Overview of status registers Overview The status system of the R S UPP has only minor differences between cascaded mode and standalone mode For a detailed description of the registers refer to Chap Remote Control ...

Page 891: ... carry out a targeted query of the slaves 8 7 3 5 SRQ in Cascading The SRQ behaves fully transparently in cascading As the instruments in the cascade extend the basic status bits the higher level mechanism also works correctly the OPC bit for example is not set until the last slave is finished with the measurement Thus the interrupt is also not activated until the entire cascade is finished with t...

Page 892: ...ands sent before OPC The slaves report the OPC event to the master on their own Only after all OPCs from all instruments have arrived will the Oper Complete bit in the ESR of the master be set WAI Synchronization Allows processing of the subsequent commands only after all previous commands have been carried out The slaves report the OPC event to the master on their own Processing of com mands does...

Page 893: ... cascade regardless of whether it is a master or slave can con trol a switcher or cascade of switchers In the operating mode GUI Control All and CASCade ASSignment ALL switcher commands are not forwarded to the slaves but instead are set only in the master exactly as with GUI Control Master On the other hand in the operating mode GUI Control Slave xx and CASCade ASSignment SLAVexx a switcher or a ...

Page 894: ...the service manual 9 2 Maintenance The audio analyzer does not require regular maintenance Maintenance is essentially restricted to cleaning the instrument It is however advisable to check the nominal data from time to time Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument Never use sol vents such as thinners acetone as these substances w...

Page 895: ...e other interfaces are described in Chap ter 2 Startup on page 21 9 4 1 IEC IEEE Bus Interface IEC 625 IEEE 488 As standard the instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus connector The connec tor socket conforming to IEEE 488 is at the rear of the instrument The interface can be used to connect a controller to allow remote control of the instrument A shielded cable is used for connection 9 4 1 1 ...

Page 896: ... to their initial setting ATN Attention Active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages non active HIGH indicates the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request Active LOW allows the connected instrument to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable Active LOW allows switchover to remote control mode EOI End or Identify This has two functions in conjunction with ...

Page 897: ...ddressing by MTA T6 Talker function full capability capability of responding to serial query unaddress ing by MLA SR1 Service request function full capability PP1 Parallel poll function full capability RL1 Remote local switchover function full capability DC1 Reset function Device Clear full capability DT1 Trigger function Device Trigger full capability C0 No controller function 9 4 1 4 IEC IEEE bu...

Page 898: ...IC command Effect on instrument SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device Terminates processing of the commands that have just been received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not modify the instrument configuration GET Group Execute Trigger IBTRG device Triggers a measurement or a sweep GTL Go to Local IBLOC device Transition to the Local state manual operation ...

Page 899: ...mitted RPC messages are known as the VXI 11 standard Messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument based on this standard The messages are identical to the SCPI commands They can be divided into four groups program messages control commands to the instrument response messages values returned by the instrument service request spontaneous requests by the instrument and low level c...

Page 900: ...idual control lers This distinction is continued down to one controller at application level i e two applications on a PC are regarded as two different controllers by an instrument Figure 9 4 Remote control via LAN with several controllers The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument to permit exclusive access As a result it is possible to control access from several controllers In the progr...

Page 901: ...ed and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not modify the instrument configura tion GTL Go to Local Transition to the Local state manual operation GTR Go to Remote Transition to the Remote state remote control GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a measurement or a sweep LLO Local Lockout The manual LOCAL switchover function is disabled POL Serial Poll A serial poll ...

Page 902: ... were just received and sets the command process ing software to a defined initial state Does not modify the instru ment configuration GTL Go to Local Transition to the Local state manual operation GTR Go to Remote Transition to the Remote state remote control GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a measurement or a sweep LLO Local Lockout The manual LOCAL switchover function is disabled POL Serial P...

Page 903: ...11 1055 32 10 Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 5 15 Shielding 6 DDC clock 16 Hotplug detect C1 CRT red 7 DDC data 17 Data 0 blue C2 CRT green 8 18 Data 0 blue C3 CRT blue 9 Data 1 green 19 Shielding C4 CRT HSync 10 Data 1 green 20 C5 CRT ground Instrument Interfaces ...

Page 904: ...ies SPEaker SOURce n3 778 AUXiliaries SPEaker VOLume n3 778 AUXiliaries TRIGger OUTPut DELay 778 AUXiliaries TRIGger OUTPut ENABle 778 AUXiliaries TRIGger OUTPut MODE 778 AUXiliaries VOLTage n2 779 DATA BARGraph COUNt X n4 748 DATA BARGraph COUNt Y n4 748 DATA BARGraph X n3 749 DATA BARGraph Y n3 749 DATA FFT COUNt X n4 748 DATA FFT COUNt Y n4 748 DATA FFT X n3 749 DATA FFT Y n3 749 DATA SWEep COU...

Page 905: ...2 A UNIT AUTO 797 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A UNIT TRACk 797 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A UNIT USER 797 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A UPDate 797 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A YSOurce 798 DISPlay BARGraph n2 A YSOurce FILE 798 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B BOTTom 790 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B CHANnel 790 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LABel AUTO 790 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LABel USER 790 DISPlay BARGraph n2 B LEGend DESCription 791 DISPlay BARGraph ...

Page 906: ...DESCription 800 DISPlay BARGraph n2 TITLe SHOW 800 DISPlay BARGraph n2 TRACk LIMit 800 DISPlay BARGraph n2 TRACk REFerence 800 DISPlay BARGraph n2 TRACk SCALing 801 DISPlay BARGraph n2 XCURsor MODE 818 DISPlay BARGraph n2 XCURsor POSMode 819 DISPlay BARGraph n2 XCURsor SETTo MAX 820 DISPlay BARGraph n2 XCURsor SETTo MIN 820 DISPlay BARGraph n2 XCURsor SETTo XPOS 822 DISPlay BARGraph n2 XCURsor SET...

Page 907: ...lay FFT n2 B LABel AUTO 790 DISPlay FFT n2 B LABel USER 790 DISPlay FFT n2 B LEGend DESCription 791 DISPlay FFT n2 B LEGend SHOW 791 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMLower 791 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMLower SOURce 792 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMLower SOURce FILE 792 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMLower SOURce VALue 792 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMShift 792 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMShift PARallel 793 DISPlay FFT n2 B LIMShift SYMMetrical 793 DISP...

Page 908: ...Play FFT n2 TITLe DESCription 800 DISPlay FFT n2 TITLe SHOW 800 DISPlay FFT n2 TRACk LIMit 800 DISPlay FFT n2 TRACk REFerence 800 DISPlay FFT n2 TRACk SCALing 801 DISPlay FFT n2 X LABel AUTO 801 DISPlay FFT n2 X LABel USER 801 DISPlay FFT n2 X LEFT 801 DISPlay FFT n2 X REFerence VALue 802 DISPlay FFT n2 X RIGHt 802 DISPlay FFT n2 X SCALing 802 DISPlay FFT n2 X SPACing 802 DISPlay FFT n2 X UNIT 802...

Page 909: ...EFerence FILE 795 DISPlay SWEep n2 A REFerence VALue 795 DISPlay SWEep n2 A SPACing 796 DISPlay SWEep n2 A TOP 796 DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT 796 DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT AUTO 797 DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT TRACk 797 DISPlay SWEep n2 A UNIT USER 797 DISPlay SWEep n2 A UPDate 797 DISPlay SWEep n2 A YSOurce 798 DISPlay SWEep n2 A YSOurce FILE 798 DISPlay SWEep n2 B BOTTom 790 DISPlay SWEep n2 B CHANnel 790...

Page 910: ...ep n2 OCURsor POSMode 819 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MAX 820 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MIN 820 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MRKA 821 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo MRKB 821 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo XPOS 822 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor SETTo YPOS 822 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor STATe 823 DISPlay SWEep n2 OCURsor Y 823 DISPlay SWEep n2 SCANoffset 741 DISPlay SWEep n2 SMODe 800 DISPlay SWE...

Page 911: ...MMetrical 793 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LIMUpper 793 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LIMUpper SOURce 794 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LIMUpper SOURce FILE 794 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A LIMUpper SOURce VALue 794 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A MARKer MODE 817 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A MARKer SETTo OCURsor 817 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A MARKer SETTo XCURsor 817 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A MARKer SETTo XPOS 818 DISPlay WAVeform n2 A REFerence 795 DI...

Page 912: ...ay WAVeform n2 DLISt FILTer 798 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor MODE 818 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor POSMode 819 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo MAX 820 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo MIN 820 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo MRKA 821 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo MRKB 821 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo XPOS 822 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor SETTo YPOS 822 DISPlay WAVeform n2 OCURsor STATe 8...

Page 913: ...y SOURce 829 HCOPy IMMediate 829 INITiate 733 INITiate CONTinuous 731 INITiate CONTinuous TIMeout 732 INITiate FORCe 732 INPut MIMPedance CHANnels 723 INPut MIMPedance n2 722 INPut 1 AUDiobits 725 INPut 1 BANDwidth MODE 722 INPut 1 BCLK FREQuency 726 INPut 1 CHANnel 725 INPut 1 COUPling CHANnels 722 INPut 1 FBIT 726 INPut 1 FILTer 773 INPut 1 FORMat 726 INPut 1 FSLope 726 INPut 1 INPut 727 INPut 1...

Page 914: ...e 711 MMEMory LOAD OEQualize 697 MMEMory LOAD PHASe 718 MMEMory LOAD STATe 832 MMEMory LOAD STEReo n3 OEQualize 701 MMEMory LOAD VOLTage 718 MMEMory MDIRectory 834 MMEMory MOVE 834 MMEMory STORe PWAVeform 764 MMEMory STORe STATe 832 MMEMory SWEep n2 EQUalization INVert 803 MMEMory SWEep n2 EQUalization MODify 803 MMEMory SWEep n2 EQUalization NORMfrequency 803 MMEMory SWEep n2 LIMit OFFSet 803 MME...

Page 915: ...EQuency LIMit 762 SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit LOWer 760 SENSe 1 FREQuency LIMit UPPer 760 SENSe 1 FREQuency SELect 755 SENSe 1 FUNCtion APERture MODE 753 SENSe 1 FUNCtion BARGraph 758 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DCSuppression 757 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DELay MODE 766 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DELay VALue 766 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DISTortion n3 759 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DMAX 759 SENSe 1 FUNCtion DMIN 759 SENSe 1 FUNCtion FFT AVERage 762 ...

Page 916: ...Reshold LOW 769 SENSe 1 LIPSync COLor THReshold HIGH STRing 770 SENSe 1 LIPSync COLor THReshold LOW STRing 770 SENSe 1 MAX FFT SIZE 723 SENSe 1 POWer REFerence RESistance 723 SENSe 1 REFerence CHANnel 723 SENSe 1 SWEep CONTrol 755 SENSe 1 SWEep POINts 756 SENSe 1 SWEep SPACing 756 SENSe 1 SWEep STARt 756 SENSe 1 SWEep STEP 756 SENSe 1 SWEep STOP 756 SENSe 1 THDN REJection 760 SENSe 1 TRIGger SETTl...

Page 917: ...ENSe 1 2 6 UNIT 813 SENSe 1 2 6 USERunit 813 SENSe 1 7 CMPFactor 767 SENSe 8 PROTocol CH 1 2 BYTE 0 4 750 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor CRC 1 2 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor INV 1 2 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor LOC 1 2 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor PAR 1 2 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor PCM 1 2 751 SENSe 8 PROTocol ERRor 750 SENSe2 FUNCtion SNDMonitor 771 SENSe3 FREQuency APERture MODE 770 SENSe3 FREQuency LEFT 806 ...

Page 918: ...ne VOLTage 712 SOURce ARBitrary MODE 712 SOURce ARBitrary RELoad 712 SOURce ARBitrary TIME 712 SOURce FADin VALue 764 SOURce FILTer 776 SOURce FILTer CHANnels 701 SOURce FREQuency CH2Stereo 701 SOURce FREQuency DIFFerence 706 SOURce FREQuency MEAN 707 SOURce FREQuency REFerence 689 SOURce FREQuency SELect 701 SOURce FREQuency n2 697 SOURce FUNCtion 697 SOURce FUNCtion MODE 703 SOURce HDMI AUDio FO...

Page 919: ...UTing 709 SOURce PLAY RESTart 709 SOURce PLAY SCALepktofs 709 SOURce PLAY TIME 709 SOURce PROTocol AZERo 715 SOURce PROTocol CH n3 BYTE n4 715 SOURce PROTocol CRC 716 SOURce PROTocol FILE 716 SOURce PROTocol MODE 716 SOURce PROTocol NUMerical BYTE 716 SOURce PROTocol NUMerical CH 716 SOURce PROTocol NUMerical VALue 716 SOURce PROTocol VALidity 717 SOURce RANDom FREQuency LOWer 707 SOURce RANDom FR...

Page 920: ...2 SOURce SYNC TO 692 SOURce VOLTage CH2Stereo 702 SOURce VOLTage CREStfactor MODE 704 SOURce VOLTage EQUalize 699 SOURce VOLTage EQUalize CHANnels 702 SOURce VOLTage MAXimum 690 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 699 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 CHANnels 702 SOURce VOLTage OFFSet n3 STATe 700 SOURce VOLTage RANGe 690 SOURce VOLTage RATio 702 SOURce VOLTage REFerence 689 SOURce VOLTage RMS 704 SOURce VOLTage SEL...

Page 921: ...QUEue NEXT 844 STATus XQUEstionabl CONDition 842 STATus XQUEstionabl ENABle 843 STATus XQUEstionabl EVENt 843 STATus XQUEstionabl NTRansition 843 STATus XQUEstionabl PTRansition 843 SWITcher COMPort 779 SWITcher INPA 779 SWITcher INPB 779 SWITcher OFFSet BVSA 780 SWITcher OFFSet OVSI 780 SWITcher OUTA 780 SWITcher OUTB 780 SWITcher STATe 780 SWITcher TRACking 780 SYSTem CASCade PORTno 844 SYSTem C...

Page 922: ...2 LOAD COUNt BY 744 TRACe BARGraph n2 STORe AY 825 TRACe BARGraph n2 STORe BY 825 TRACe FFT n2 LDList AX 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList AY 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList BX 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList BY 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt AX 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt AY 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt BX 745 TRACe FFT n2 LDList COUNt BY 745 TRACe FFT n2 LOAD AX 743 TRACe FFT n2 LOAD AY 743 TRACe FFT n2 LOAD BX 743 TRA...

Page 923: ... BX 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList BY 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList COUNt AX 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList COUNt AY 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList COUNt BX 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LDList COUNt BY 746 TRACe WAVeform n2 LOAD AX 743 TRACe WAVeform n2 LOAD AY 743 TRACe WAVeform n2 LOAD BX 743 TRACe WAVeform n2 LOAD BY 743 TRACe WAVeform n2 LOAD COUNt AX 743 TRACe WAVeform n2 LOAD COUNt AY 743 TRACe WAVeform n...

Page 924: ...log Generator 196 Analysis in the time domain 430 766 with cursors 161 with markers 161 Analysis protocol 332 Analyzer Function filters 467 Prefilter 467 Analyzer filter 378 394 404 426 Analyzer status 193 Analyzer select 720 Anlr Channels 317 Anlr Sync 291 Append Replace 543 Arbitrary 255 708 Universal 275 Arbitrary Mode Universal 270 ARC Port 326 Asterisk 655 ATN 880 Attention 880 Attenuation Fi...

Page 925: ...urst interval sweep 288 289 Button Sequence 170 173 C Casc Port No 494 Case sensitivity SCPI 681 CEC 327 CEC Consumer Electronics Control HDMI generator 226 Center frequency DFD 248 Center Frequency Filter 474 Centerfrequency Sweep 371 Chan Status 312 Change language option 626 Changes 442 Changing unit 137 Channel 316 330 521 HDMI generator 227 Play 258 Universal 273 Channel 1 433 Channel 2 433 C...

Page 926: ...ent Voltage 264 DC Adjusting 193 DC coupling 377 414 Level measurement 359 DC measurement function 375 DC Offset Arbitrary 256 Chirp 267 DFD 249 Mod Dist 246 Multisine 242 Play 263 Random 254 Sine 235 Sine Burst 244 Universal 274 DC Offset Mode Stereo sine 239 DC Offset State Stereo sine 239 DC Suppress 377 DC suppression 414 DC Suppression 377 Level measurement 359 DC voltage 375 DC Voltage Measu...

Page 927: ...LAN 882 Even Harmonics 387 Even Harmonics Odd Harmonics 426 EVENt 664 Example Measuring frequency response 91 Measuring total harmonic distortion 102 Example setups 110 Examples Settling of start conditions 466 Excel 626 Export 626 Extended Display Identification Data 327 External frequency sweep 344 External keyboard 42 External level sweep 344 External software 40 External sweep 342 350 External...

Page 928: ... Fix Size Auto Size button 124 Fixed range 307 Flat Top window 410 Fnct Settling 422 460 Forever 442 Format 319 326 I2S generator 216 Format Phase 454 Frame rate HDMI generator 223 Free Text 554 Freezing graphic 523 Freq 344 Freq Grp Del 450 Freq Phase 450 Freq Sample Freq 450 Freq Ch1 344 Stereo sine 237 Freq Ch2 344 Freq Fast 344 Freq Fast Ch1 344 Freq Fast Ch2 344 Freq File 296 Freq Mode 701 St...

Page 929: ... 228 HDMI sample frequency variable 229 HDMI Source Product Description Info Frame 225 HDMI stream header 229 HDMI sync source 227 HDMI Vendor Info Frame 226 HDMI video content 224 HDMI video format 224 HDMI video identification code 224 HDMI video resolution 223 HDMI video source 223 HDMI VSYNC frequency 223 HDMI word width 228 I2S 212 I2S B2 interface assignment 219 I2S audio bits 214 I2S Audio ...

Page 930: ...Input coupling 304 305 Input Help 87 141 Input impedance 306 Input level 115 455 Input Monitor 456 770 Input Type 725 Input voltage permissible 36 Installed options remote control 686 Instrument 301 Instrument Concept 113 Instrument feet 35 Instrument settings saving loading 180 Instruments button 172 Integration time 409 FFT 419 Interface assignment digital generator B2 210 digital generator B4 2...

Page 931: ...controlled sweep 295 Load Instrument settings 180 Traces 160 Loading Predefined Instrument Setups 110 LOCAL key 640 641 Log Points 293 Log Steps 293 Logarithmic step size 295 Logarithmic sweep 292 293 Long 442 Loudspeaker 486 Lower Freq Mod Dist 246 Random 253 Lower limit 539 580 Lower limit x axis 551 Lowpass filter 471 LXI LAN eXtensions 52 LXI browser interface 54 LXI website 54 M Main grid 501...

Page 932: ...irectories 51 New Scan 543 Next Bin 164 Next Peak 164 Next Pixel 164 Next Sample 165 Next Step 164 291 718 Next Value 165 No of Sine Multisine 241 Noise 391 Noise component DFD 248 Sine 233 Universal 269 Noise Density 523 Noise factor 391 Noise signal 249 Nominal range value 307 Norm Freq 556 Norm frequency 556 Normalization 527 Normalization value 527 528 Normalize 527 Normalize Value 528 Normali...

Page 933: ...t Cond Time Tick Chart 349 Sweep 370 Polarity 263 709 Polarity Measurement 400 761 Poles zeros file 476 Pos Peak 374 377 Post FFT 384 407 411 Power supply connection 36 PPE parallel poll enable 668 Pre Filter 320 331 Prec 453 Prechirp Time 267 Precision 453 Preemphasis inverted 556 multistage 557 Offset 557 Offset value 558 Prefiltering 306 PRESET 687 Presets 39 Presets IEC IEEE 658 Pretrigger 435...

Page 934: ...5 Restart Play 259 Universal 271 Result lists 568 RGB color HDMI generator 225 RGB String 448 Lip Sync 279 Rife Vincent x 410 Right 551 590 Rising 435 Risk of overheating 36 RMS 377 456 RMS measurement selective 363 wideband 361 RMS Measurement 754 RMS Selective Measurement 754 RMS value Multisine 241 RST IEC IEEE bus address 28 845 S S N measurements 375 S N Sequence 381 Safety precautions 33 Sam...

Page 935: ...Source Product Description 327 Source Product Description Info Frame 327 HDMI generator 225 Source Value 538 541 Spacing 293 533 551 589 Multisine 240 Random 252 Sweep 369 SPD 327 SPD Info Frame 327 HDMI generator 225 Speaker 486 Special characters SCPI 682 Spectral display 408 Spectral range 408 Spectrum 408 Spectrum display 781 Splash screen 37 SRE service request enable 667 SRQ 880 SRQ service ...

Page 936: ...s 285 717 Switcher 491 Switcher Panel 489 779 Switching on the instrument 37 Symmetr Shift 542 Symmetrical 542 Sync input digital generator 207 Sync source digital generator 206 HDMI generator 227 I2S generator 213 Sync termination digital generator 207 Synchronization IEC IEEE 660 Synchronous sweep 290 Syntax elements Command 655 System directory 830 System partition 65 69 T Terminated 193 Termin...

Page 937: ...e 431 Unit 530 548 571 580 585 Unit Auto 531 550 572 585 Unit for S N measurement results 185 Unit Funct Track 528 571 Unit of measurement result 148 Unit User String 532 550 Units 183 683 Units for digital level measurement results 184 Units for distortion measurement results 184 Units for frequency measurement results 185 Units for group delay measurement results 185 Units for phase measurement ...

Page 938: ...ighting Filters 378 394 404 478 Level measurement 360 White space 655 Wideband RMS 361 Width Filter 474 Win Style 498 Window 408 Window function 408 410 Windows 40 Windows 7 Recovery and Backup 67 Windows button 170 175 Windows XP Recovery and Backup 63 Word Length 317 Word offset I2S generator 217 Word Offset 320 Word width Digital analyzer 312 digital generator 208 HDMI generator 228 I2S generat...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands